Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

235
OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System V100R007 Product Description Issue 01 Date 2007-06-15 Part Number 31400815 Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Transcript of Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Page 1: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

V100R007

Product Description

Issue 01

Date 2007-06-15

Part Number 31400815

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Page 2: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Page 3: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Network Application.................................................................................................................1-1

2 Function........................................................................................................................................2-12.1 Capacity...........................................................................................................................................................2-3

2.1.1 Cross-Connect Capacity.........................................................................................................................2-32.1.2 Slot Access Capacity..............................................................................................................................2-4

2.2 Service.............................................................................................................................................................2-62.2.1 SDH Services.........................................................................................................................................2-62.2.2 PDH Services.........................................................................................................................................2-72.2.3 Ethernet Services....................................................................................................................................2-72.2.4 RPR Services..........................................................................................................................................2-72.2.5 ATM Services........................................................................................................................................2-72.2.6 DDN Services.........................................................................................................................................2-72.2.7 SAN Services.........................................................................................................................................2-72.2.8 Service Access Capacity........................................................................................................................2-8

2.3 Interface...........................................................................................................................................................2-92.3.1 Service Interfaces...................................................................................................................................2-92.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary Interfaces..............................................................................................2-10

2.4 Networking....................................................................................................................................................2-112.5 Built-in WDM Technology...........................................................................................................................2-132.6 ROPA System...............................................................................................................................................2-132.7 Intelligent Power Adjustment........................................................................................................................2-142.8 External Clock Output Shutdown Function..................................................................................................2-142.9 Extended Subrack..........................................................................................................................................2-142.10 Board REG Function...................................................................................................................................2-152.11 Protection....................................................................................................................................................2-17

2.11.1 Equipment Level Protection...............................................................................................................2-172.11.2 Network Level Protection..................................................................................................................2-18

2.12 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................................2-182.13 TCM............................................................................................................................................................2-192.14 E13/M13 Function.......................................................................................................................................2-192.15 RPR.............................................................................................................................................................2-19

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Contents

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i

Page 4: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

2.16 ETH-OAM..................................................................................................................................................2-202.17 Software Package Loading..........................................................................................................................2-202.18 Hot Fix.........................................................................................................................................................2-212.19 Inter-Board Alarm Suppression..................................................................................................................2-212.20 PRBS Function............................................................................................................................................2-212.21 Board Version Replacement........................................................................................................................2-222.22 OAM Information Interworking..................................................................................................................2-222.23 Clock...........................................................................................................................................................2-23

3 Hardware......................................................................................................................................3-13.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................3-23.2 Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................3-23.3 Subrack............................................................................................................................................................3-4

3.3.1 Subrack Structure...................................................................................................................................3-43.3.2 Slot Allocation........................................................................................................................................3-53.3.3 Technical Specifications......................................................................................................................3-28

3.4 Boards............................................................................................................................................................3-293.4.1 Board Type...........................................................................................................................................3-293.4.2 SDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-333.4.3 PDH Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-353.4.4 DDN Processing Boards.......................................................................................................................3-363.4.5 Data Processing Boards........................................................................................................................3-373.4.6 WDM Boards.......................................................................................................................................3-393.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier Boards........................................................................................................3-393.4.8 Auxiliary Boards..................................................................................................................................3-40

4 Software....................................................................................................................................... 4-14.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................4-24.2 Board Software................................................................................................................................................4-24.3 NE Software....................................................................................................................................................4-34.4 T2000 System..................................................................................................................................................4-44.5 ASON Software...............................................................................................................................................4-5

5 Data Features...............................................................................................................................5-15.1 Ethernet Features.............................................................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 Functions................................................................................................................................................5-25.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................5-75.1.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-11

5.2 RPR Features.................................................................................................................................................5-145.2.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-145.2.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-185.2.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-20

5.3 ATM Features...............................................................................................................................................5-235.3.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-23

ContentsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 5: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

5.3.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-255.3.3 Protection.............................................................................................................................................5-29

5.4 SAN Features................................................................................................................................................5-305.5 DDN Features................................................................................................................................................5-31

5.5.1 Functions..............................................................................................................................................5-315.5.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................5-32

6 DCN Features..............................................................................................................................6-16.1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Background of SDH DCN......................................................................................................................6-26.1.2 SDH DCN Solutions..............................................................................................................................6-3

6.2 HWECC..........................................................................................................................................................6-46.2.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-46.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-5

6.3 IP Over DCC...................................................................................................................................................6-66.3.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-66.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-6

6.4 OSI Over DCC................................................................................................................................................6-76.4.1 Features..................................................................................................................................................6-86.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................6-8

7 ASON Features...........................................................................................................................7-17.1 Automatic Discovery of the Topologies.........................................................................................................7-3

7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control Links..........................................................................................................7-37.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE Links..................................................................................................................7-4

7.2 End-to-End Service Configuration..................................................................................................................7-57.3 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration................................................................................................7-67.4 SLA.................................................................................................................................................................7-77.5 Diamond Services...........................................................................................................................................7-87.6 Gold Services................................................................................................................................................7-127.7 Silver Services...............................................................................................................................................7-137.8 Copper Services.............................................................................................................................................7-157.9 Iron Services..................................................................................................................................................7-167.10 Tunnels........................................................................................................................................................7-177.11 Service Association.....................................................................................................................................7-187.12 Service Optimization...................................................................................................................................7-197.13 Service Migration........................................................................................................................................7-207.14 Reverting Services to Original Routes........................................................................................................7-207.15 Preset Restoring Trail..................................................................................................................................7-217.16 Equilibrium of Network Traffic..................................................................................................................7-217.17 Shared Risk Link Group..............................................................................................................................7-227.18 ASON Trail Group......................................................................................................................................7-227.19 Protocol Encryption.....................................................................................................................................7-23

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Contents

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii

Page 6: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

8 Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-18.1 Equipment Level Protection............................................................................................................................8-2

8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary Boards..................................................................................................... 8-28.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing Units....................................................................8-38.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC Unit.........................................................................................................8-48.1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 Boards..........................................................................8-48.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM Boards............................................................................................................ 8-58.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface Unit....................................................................................... 8-68.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion Unit....................................................................................8-68.1.8 Intelligent Fans.......................................................................................................................................8-68.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power Supply.............................................................................. 8-78.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal Conditions.....................................................................8-7

8.2 Network Level Protection............................................................................................................................... 8-78.2.1 Linear MSP............................................................................................................................................ 8-88.2.2 MSP Ring...............................................................................................................................................8-98.2.3 SNCP....................................................................................................................................................8-118.2.4 DNI.......................................................................................................................................................8-158.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail Protection..................................................................................................8-168.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSP....................................................................................................................8-178.2.7 RPR Protection.....................................................................................................................................8-188.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring Protection..............................................................................................................8-19

9 Clock.............................................................................................................................................9-19.1 Clock Source...................................................................................................................................................9-2

9.1.1 External Clock Source............................................................................................................................9-29.1.2 Line Clock Source..................................................................................................................................9-29.1.3 Tributary Clock Source..........................................................................................................................9-29.1.4 Internal Clock Source.............................................................................................................................9-3

9.2 Clock Working Mode......................................................................................................................................9-39.2.1 Locked Mode..........................................................................................................................................9-39.2.2 Hold-Over Mode....................................................................................................................................9-39.2.3 Free-Run Mode...................................................................................................................................... 9-3

9.3 Clock Outputs..................................................................................................................................................9-39.4 Clock Protection..............................................................................................................................................9-4

9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not Enabled ........................................................................................9-49.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM Enabled ............................................................................... 9-59.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM Enabled ...............................................................................9-5

9.5 Tributary Retiming..........................................................................................................................................9-69.5.1 Retiming Principle..................................................................................................................................9-79.5.2 Application of the Retiming Function....................................................................................................9-7

10 OAM.........................................................................................................................................10-110.1 Operation and Maintenance........................................................................................................................10-210.2 Network Management.................................................................................................................................10-3

ContentsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 7: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

10.3 Security Management..................................................................................................................................10-3

11 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................11-111.1 Interface Types............................................................................................................................................11-311.2 Specifications of the Optical Interface........................................................................................................11-3

11.2.1 SDH Optical Interface........................................................................................................................11-311.2.2 Ethernet Optical Interface..................................................................................................................11-911.2.3 ATM Optical Interface.....................................................................................................................11-1011.2.4 Laser Safety Class............................................................................................................................11-11

11.3 Specifications of Electrical Interfaces.......................................................................................................11-1211.3.1 PDH Electrical Interface..................................................................................................................11-1211.3.2 DDN Interface..................................................................................................................................11-1211.3.3 Auxiliary Interface...........................................................................................................................11-13

11.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance.....................................................................................11-1511.4.1 Clock Interface Type........................................................................................................................11-1511.4.2 Timing and Synchronization Performance.......................................................................................11-15

11.5 Transmission Performance........................................................................................................................11-1511.6 Timeslot Numbering.................................................................................................................................11-1611.7 Power Supply Specification......................................................................................................................11-1611.8 Power Consumption and Weight of Boards..............................................................................................11-1711.9 Electromagnetic Compatibility.................................................................................................................11-2011.10 Safety Certification.................................................................................................................................11-2011.11 Environmental Specification...................................................................................................................11-2111.12 Environment Requirement......................................................................................................................11-22

11.12.1 Environment for Storage................................................................................................................11-2211.12.2 Environment for Transportation.....................................................................................................11-2411.12.3 Environment for Operation............................................................................................................11-26

A Compliant Standards...............................................................................................................A-1A.1 ITU-T Recommendations..............................................................................................................................A-2A.2 IEEE Standards..............................................................................................................................................A-3A.3 IETF Standards..............................................................................................................................................A-4A.4 Environment Related Standards....................................................................................................................A-4

B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1

C Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................C-1

Index.................................................................................................................................................i-1

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Contents

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v

Page 8: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 9: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figures

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................................1-2Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500....................................................................................1-3Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used......................................................2-4Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used.......................................................2-5Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used..................................................2-5Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used...................................................2-5Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used....................................................2-6Figure 2-6 ROPA System...................................................................................................................................2-14Figure 2-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack....................................................2-15Figure 2-8 Hybrid application of ADM and REG..............................................................................................2-16Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment....................................................................................3-2Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet.........................................................................................................3-3Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.........................................................................................3-5Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack......................................................................................3-6Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500...................................................................................3-30Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................................................4-2Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture...............................................................................................................4-5Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port..................................................................................................................5-7Figure 5-2 EPL service based on port+VLAN.....................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-3 EVPL service......................................................................................................................................5-9Figure 5-4 EPLAN service.................................................................................................................................5-10Figure 5-5 EVPLAN service..............................................................................................................................5-11Figure 5-6 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS..............................................................................5-12Figure 5-7 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS....................................................................5-12Figure 5-8 RPR ring...........................................................................................................................................5-14Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse......................................................................................................................................5-17Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1........................................................................................5-18Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different.........................................................................5-18Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping........................................................................5-19Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence.............................................................................................................5-19Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service....................................................................................................................5-20Figure 5-15 Wrapping protection.......................................................................................................................5-21Figure 5-16 Steering protection..........................................................................................................................5-21

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Figures

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii

Page 10: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-17 Wrapping+steering protection........................................................................................................5-22Figure 5-18 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services.......................................................................5-27Figure 5-19 VP-Ring/VC-Ring..........................................................................................................................5-28Figure 5-20 IMA service networking.................................................................................................................5-29Figure 6-1 DCN networking.................................................................................................................................6-2Figure 6-2 Positions of D bytes in SDH overheads..............................................................................................6-3Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC.........................................................................................................6-5Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)................................6-5Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)..................................6-6Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (IP)......................................6-7Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (IP)....................................6-7Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (OSI)...................................6-8Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (OSI).................................6-9Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links..........................................................................................................7-3Figure 7-2 Management of control topology.......................................................................................................7-4Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery.......................................................................................................................7-5Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration.......................................................................................................7-6Figure 7-5 Trail restoration..................................................................................................................................7-7Figure 7-6 Diamond Services...............................................................................................................................7-9Figure 7-7 Gold services....................................................................................................................................7-12Figure 7-8 A silver service.................................................................................................................................7-14Figure 7-9 Tunnel...............................................................................................................................................7-17Figure 7-10 Lower cross-connnection................................................................................................................7-18Figure 7-11 Service Association........................................................................................................................7-19Figure 7-12 Traffic equilibrium.........................................................................................................................7-22Figure 7-13 LCAS (different path).....................................................................................................................7-23Figure 7-14 LCAS (same path)..........................................................................................................................7-23Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail.........................8-12Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection......................................................................................................8-13Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking.........................................................................................................................8-14Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure..................................................................8-14Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure....................................................................8-15Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings...................................................................................................8-16Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection..................................................................................................8-17Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP.................................................................................................................8-17Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines.........................................................................8-17Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate................................................................................8-18Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR........................................................................................................8-18Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection...............................................................................................................8-19Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection..................................................................................................................8-19Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection.........................................................................................................8-20Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled...........................................................................................9-5

FiguresOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

viii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 11: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM........................................................................................................9-5Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled...............................................................9-6Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID...........................................................................................................9-6Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram................................................................................................................9-7Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming.....................................................................................9-8Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming..........................................................................................9-8

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Figures

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix

Page 12: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 13: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Tables

Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................................. 2-3Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500................................................................2-8Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................................................................2-9Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................2-10Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................................................................2-11Table 2-6 Configuration of the extended subrack..............................................................................................2-15Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG function...............................................................................................2-16Table 2-8 Optical interfaces for the REG...........................................................................................................2-16Table 2-9 Equipment level protection................................................................................................................2-17Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500...........................................2-18Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets..................................................................................... 3-3Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards.........................3-7Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................................... 3-7Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack................................................................3-29Table 3-5 Constituent boards and functions of each unit...................................................................................3-30Table 3-6 SDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-33Table 3-7 PDH processing boards......................................................................................................................3-35Table 3-8 DDN processing boards.....................................................................................................................3-36Table 3-9 Data processing boards and their interfaces.......................................................................................3-37Table 3-10 WDM boards and theri interfaces....................................................................................................3-39Table 3-11 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces......................................................................3-39Table 3-12 Auxiliary boards and theri interfaces...............................................................................................3-40Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0...........................................................................................................5-2Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2...........................................................................................................................5-3Table 5-3 Function list of N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A............................................................................5-5Table 5-4 Function list of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4...............................................................................................5-5Table 5-5 Function list of RPR boards...............................................................................................................5-15Table 5-6 RPR service class...............................................................................................................................5-16Table 5-7 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1..........................................................................................................5-23Table 5-8 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1.............................................................................................................5-24Table 5-9 ATM service types and traffic types..................................................................................................5-26Table 5-10 Classification of ATM protection....................................................................................................5-29Table 5-11 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4...........................................................................5-30

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Tables

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi

Page 14: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 5-12 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA...........................................................5-31Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500..................................................................................6-4Table 7-1 Service level.........................................................................................................................................7-7Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services.........................................................................................................7-8Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services..............................................................................7-9Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service...............................................................................7-10Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service........................................................................7-11Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services.................................................................................................................7-13Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services................................................................................................................7-14Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services..............................................................................................................7-16Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services..................................................................................................................7-16Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels.........................................................................................................................7-18Table 7-11 Attributes of service association......................................................................................................7-19Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes.................................................................................................7-21Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards....................................................................................8-3Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters...................................................................................................................8-3Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units......................................................8-4Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit........................................................................................8-4Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4.........................................................................8-5Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards..........................................................................................8-5Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX..............................................................................8-6Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters........................................................................................................................8-8Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.................................................8-9Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters........................................................................................................................8-10Table 8-11 SNCP parameters.............................................................................................................................8-12Table 11-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500......................................................................................11-3Table 11-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................11-4Table 11-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500..........................................11-4Table 11-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................11-5Table 11-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-5Table 11-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................11-6Table 11-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-7Table 11-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces......................................11-8Table 11-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500........................................11-9Table 11-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces................................................................................11-10Table 11-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-10Table 11-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.............................11-11Table 11-13 Laser safety class..........................................................................................................................11-11Table 11-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces..................................................................................11-12Table 11-15 DDN interface types.....................................................................................................................11-13Table 11-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface.......................................................................................11-13Table 11-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces.......................................................................................11-14

TablesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

xii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 15: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces.......................................................................................11-14Table 11-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface...........................................................................11-14Table 11-20 Clock features...............................................................................................................................11-15Table 11-21 Timing and synchronization performance....................................................................................11-15Table 11-22 Transmission performance...........................................................................................................11-16Table 11-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)....................................................................................11-16Table 11-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)..................................................................................11-16Table 11-25 Power supply specifications.........................................................................................................11-16Table 11-26 Power consumption and weight of boards...................................................................................11-17Table 11-27 EMC test results...........................................................................................................................11-20Table 11-28 Safety certifications......................................................................................................................11-21Table 11-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation...................................................................11-22Table 11-30 Climate requirements for storage.................................................................................................11-22Table 11-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage......................................11-23Table 11-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage..........................................11-24Table 11-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage.....................................................................11-24Table 11-34 Climate requirements for transportation......................................................................................11-25Table 11-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation...........................11-25Table 11-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation...............................11-26Table 11-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation..........................................................11-26Table 11-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity................................................................................11-26Table 11-39 Other climate requirements..........................................................................................................11-27Table 11-40 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance...............................................11-27Table 11-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation......................................11-28Table 11-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation.................................................................11-28Table A-1 IUT-T recommendations....................................................................................................................A-2Table A-2 IEEE standards...................................................................................................................................A-3Table A-3 IETF standards...................................................................................................................................A-4Table A-4 Environment related standards...........................................................................................................A-4

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Tables

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xiii

Page 16: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 17: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the OptiX OSN 3500 in the terms of network application, functions,hardware and software structure, and features.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 3500 V100R007

Intended AudienceThe intended audiences of this document are:

l Policy planning

l Installation and Commissioning engineer

l NM configuration engineer

l Technical support engineer

OrganizationThis document is organized as follows.

Chapter Description

1 Network Application Describes the OptiX OSN 3500 and its position in thenetwork.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description About This Document

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1

Page 18: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Chapter Description

2 Function This chapter generally describes the features of the OptiXOSN 3500 in the terms of capacity, interface, built-in WDMtechnology, ROP system, REG, protection, TCM andnetwork management.

3 Hardware Describes the mechanical structure and the adaptablecabinet installation of the OptiX OSN 3500.

4 Software Describes the software system of the OptiX OSN 3500. Itincludes intelligent software, board software, NE softwareand NM software.

5 Data Features Describes the Ethernet, RPR and ATM features of theOptiX OSN 3500 in terms of function, application andprotection.

6 DCN Features This chapter describes the DCN feature supported by theOptiX OSN 3500.

7 ASON Features This chapter introduces the ASON features of the OptiXOSN 3500 in terms of service classes and application.

8 Protection Describes protection modes (including equipment level andnetwork level) and characteristics supported by the OptiXOSN 3500.

9 Clock This chapter describes the clock function of the OptiX OSN3500.

10 OAM This chapter describes main technical characteristics of theOptiX OSN 3500 in terms of safe operation, maintenanceand centralised management.

11 Technical Specifications This chapter describes the interface specifications,transmission performance and environment requirementsfor the OptiX OSN 3500.

A Compliant Standards This appendix lists international standards to which theOptiX OSN 3500 conforms in terms of design andperformance.

B Glossary This appendix lists the terms used in this document.

C Acronyms andAbbreviations

The appendix lists the acronyms used in this document.

Conventions

Symbol Conventions

The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows.

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 19: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which,if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if notavoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, andperformance degradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or saveyour time.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize orsupplement important points of the main text.

General ConventionsConvention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. Forexample, log in as user root.

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

Command ConventionsConvention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] areoptional.

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square bracketsand separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated byvertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all canbe selected.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description About This Document

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3

Page 20: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

GUI Conventions

Convention Description

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are inboldface. For example, click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. Forexample, choose File > Create > Folder.

Keyboard Operation

Format Description

Key Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab.

Key 1+Key 2 Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressingCtrl+Alt+A means thethree keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key 1, Key 2 Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keysshould be pressed in turn.

Mouse Operation

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly withoutmoving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certainposition.

Update HistoryThis document of the V100R007 version is of the first release. Compared with the V100R006,this version has the following new or optimized content:l Description of the N1SLD64, N1SLD16, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ3, N2PD3, N2PL3,

N2PL3A, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2 and TN11CMR4 is added.l Sections of the new features are added.

– Section 2.7 "Intelligent Optical Power Adjustment"

– Section 2.8 "External Clock Output Shutdown Function"

– Section 2.17 "Software Package Loading"

– Section 2.18 "Hot Fix"

– Section 2.19 "Inter-Board Alarm Suppression"

– Section 2.10 "PRBS Function"

– Section 2.21 "Board Version Replacement"

About This DocumentOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 21: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

1 Network Application

The OptiX OSN 3500 is mainly used at the convergence layer and the backbone layer of anMAN transmission network.

The OptiX OSN 3500 is new generation equipment developed by Huawei Technologies Co.,Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Huawei). The OptiX OSN 3500 integrates the followingtechnologies:

l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH)

l Ethernet

l Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM)

l Storage area network (SAN)

l Wavelength division multiplexing (WDM)

l Digital data network (DDN)

l Automatically switched optical network (ASON)

The OptiX OSN 3500 transmits voice and data services on the same platform with highefficiency.

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 1 Network Application

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1

Page 22: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 1-1 Appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500

The OptiX OSN 3500 can also be networked with the following equipment to optimize theinvestment and to lower the networking costs for customers.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can be networked with the following equipment:

l OptiX OSN 9500

l OptiX OSN 7500

l OptiX OSN 3500T

l OptiX OSN 2500

l OptiX OSN 2500 REG

l OptiX OSN 1500

Figure 1-2 shows the application of the OptiX OSN 3500 in a transmission network.

1 Network ApplicationOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 23: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 1-2 Network application of the OptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 9500

Backbonelayer

OptiX OSN 3500 OptiX OSN 7500

OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 2500OptiX OSN 1500

Convergencelayer

Accesslayer

GSM/CDMA Ethernet SANPSTN ATM. . .

Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM)Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)Public Switched Telephony Network (PSTN)

EthernetStorage Area Network (SAN)

OptiX OSN 3500T

OptiX OSN 3500TOptiX OSN 3500

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 1 Network Application

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3

Page 24: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 25: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

2 Function

About This Chapter

The equipment has many functions.

2.1 CapacityThe capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and access capacity.

2.2 ServiceThe supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.

2.3 InterfaceThe interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.4 NetworkingThe OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network andthe chain network.

2.5 Built-in WDM TechnologyThe equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of severalwavelengths in one fiber.

2.6 ROPA SystemThe equipment supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmitsignals in a long distance.

2.7 Intelligent Power AdjustmentThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.

2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown FunctionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the external clock output shutdown function.

2.9 Extended SubrackThe OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 xE3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection for E1/T1services and 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services.

2.10 Board REG FunctionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function.

2.11 Protection

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1

Page 26: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.12 ASON FeaturesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize theintelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.

2.13 TCMThe tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.

2.14 E13/M13 FunctionThe E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16×E1/21×T1 signals into one E3/T3 signalor to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16×E1/21×T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports theE13/M13 function.

2.15 RPRThe RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut ora link failure.

2.16 ETH-OAMWith the development of Ethernet services, the equipment maintainability becomes more andmore important.

2.17 Software Package LoadingThe software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE-level software in amass manner. The NE-level software then can be loaded and activated in a mass manner tosimplify the operations to upgrade the NE-level software. Also, you can check if the boardsoftware versions match when the board is in service. Once a board is in service, the boardsoftware versions can be automatically updated.

2.18 Hot FixThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot fix technology.

2.19 Inter-Board Alarm SuppressionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised asa result of the alarms on the line board.

2.20 PRBS FunctionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.

2.21 Board Version ReplacementThe board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board.After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board areconsistent with those of the old version board.

2.22 OAM Information InterworkingOptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking.

2.23 ClockThe OptiX OSN equipment supports the clock functions.

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 27: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

2.1 CapacityThe capacity covers the cross-connect capacity and access capacity.

2.1.1 Cross-Connect CapacityThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities.

2.1.2 Slot Access CapacityWith different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different access capacities.

2.1.1 Cross-Connect CapacityThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides cross-connect boards of different cross-connect capacities.

The following cross-connect boards can be used for the OptiX OSN 3500:

l The N1GXCSA board, which is a general cross-connect and timing board.

l The N1EXCSA board, which is an enhanced cross-connect and timing board.

l The N1UXCSA/N1UXCSB and the N1SXCSA/N1SXCSB boards, which are greatlyenhanced cross-connect and timing boards.

l The N1IXCSA/N1XCSB board, which is an infinitely enhanced cross-connect and timingboard.

l The N1XCE board, which is a lower order cross-connect board for the extended subrack.

Table 2-1 lists the cross-connect capacity of each cross-connect board for the OptiX OSN3500.

Table 2-1 Cross-connect capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500

Board HigherOrderCross-ConnectCapacity

Lower OrderCross-ConnectCapacity

AccessCapacity

Remarks

N1GXCSA 40 Gbit/s(256 x 256VC-4)

5 Gbit/s (32 x 32VC-4)

35 Gbit/s(224 x 224VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand not for connection tothe extended subrack.

N1EXCSA 80 Gbit/s(512 x 512VC-4)

5 Gbit/s (32 x 32VC-4)

58.75Gbit/s(376 x 376VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand not for connection tothe extended subrack.

N1UXCSA 80 Gbit/s(512 x 512VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x128 VC-4)

58.75Gbit/s(376 x 376VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand not for connection tothe extended subrack.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3

Page 28: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board HigherOrderCross-ConnectCapacity

Lower OrderCross-ConnectCapacity

AccessCapacity

Remarks

N1UXCSB 80 Gbit/s(512 x 512VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x128 VC-4)

60 Gbit/s(384 x 384VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand for connection to the1.25 Gbit/s extendedsubrack.

N1SXCSA 200 Gbit/s(1280 x 1280VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x128 VC-4)

155 Gbit/s(992 x 992VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand not for connection tothe extended subrack.

N1SXCSB 200 Gbit/s(1280 x 1280VC-4)

20 Gbit/s (128 x128 VC-4)

156.25Gbit/s(1000 x1000VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand for connection to the1.25 Gbit/s extendedsubrack.

N1IXCSA 200 Gbit/s(1280 x 1280VC-4)

40 Gbit/s (256 x256 VC-4)

155 Gbit/s(992 x 992VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand not for connection tothe extended subrack.

N1IXCSB 200 Gbit/s(1280 x 1280VC-4)

40 Gbit/s (256 x256 VC-4)

156.25Gbit/s(1000 x1000VC-4)

Used for the main subrackand for connection to the1.25 Gbit/s extendedsubrack.

XCE - 1.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8VC-4)

1.25 Gbit/s (8 x 8VC-4)

Used for the extendedsubrack.

2.1.2 Slot Access CapacityWith different cross-connect boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides different access capacities.

For details, see Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2, Figure 2-3, Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-1 Access capacity of each slot when the N1GXCSA board is used

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

N1G

XC

SA

N1G

XC

SA

2.5G

bit/s

622M

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

622M

bit/s

Fiber Routing

FAN FAN FAN

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

GS

CC

GS

CC

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 29: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 2-2 Access capacity of each slot when the N1EXCSA board is used

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

S17

SLOT18

or

N1E

XC

SA

N1E

XC

SA

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

Fiber routing

FAN FAN FAN

GS

CC

GS

CC

Figure 2-3 Access capacity of each slot when the N1UXCSA/B board is used

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

S17

SLOT18

or

N1U

XC

SA

/B

N1U

XC

SA

/B

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s1.

25G

bit/s

2.5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

1.25

Gbi

t/s

Fiber routing

FAN FAN FAN

GS

CC

GS

CC

Figure 2-4 Access capacity of each slot when the N1SXCSA/B board is used

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

S17

SLOT18

N1S

XC

SA

/B

N1S

XC

SA

/B

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s5G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s5G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s o

r

Fiber routing

FAN FAN FAN

GS

CC

GS

CC

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5

Page 30: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 2-5 Access capacity of each slot when the N1IXCSA/B board is used

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

S17

SLOT18

N1I

XC

SA

/B

N1I

XC

SA

/B

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s5G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s5G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s5G

bit/s

10G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

20G

bit/s

5Gbi

t/s o

r

Fiber routing

FAN FAN FAN

GS

CC

GS

CC

2.2 ServiceThe supported services are SDH services, PDH services and other services.

2.2.1 SDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process SDH services.

2.2.2 PDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process PDH services.

2.2.3 Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process Ethernet services.

2.2.4 RPR ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR).

2.2.5 ATM ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process ATM services.

2.2.6 DDN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process DDN services.

2.2.7 SAN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process SAN services.

2.2.8 Service Access CapacityThe capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies with the type and quantityof the configured boards.

2.2.1 SDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process SDH services.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following SDH services:

l Standard SDH services: STM-1/4/16/64

l Standard SDH concatenated services: VC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c

l SDH services with FEC: 10.609 Gbit/s, 2.666 Gbit/s

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 31: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

2.2.2 PDH ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process PDH services.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following PDH services:

l E1/T1 service

l E3/T3 service

l E4 service

2.2.3 Ethernet ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process Ethernet services.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces to process the following Ethernet services:

l Ethernet private line (EPL) service

l Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL) service

l Ethernet private LAN (EPLAN) service

l Ethernet virtual private LAN (EVPLAN) service

2.2.4 RPR ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides FE and GE interfaces that support the resilient packet ring (RPR).

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following RPR services:

l EVPL service

l EVPLAN service

2.2.5 ATM ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process ATM services.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following ATM services:

l Constant bit rate (CBR) service

l Real-time variable bite rate (rt-VBR) service

l Non real-time variable bite rate (nrt-VBR) service

l Unspecified bit rate (UBR) service

2.2.6 DDN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process DDN services.

The OptiX OSN 3500 can process the following DDN services:

l N x 64 kbit/s (N=1-31) service

l Framed E1 service

2.2.7 SAN ServicesThe OptiX OSN 3500 can process SAN services.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7

Page 32: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Using four independent multiservice access ports, the OptiX OSN 3500 can process thefollowing SAN services:

l Fiber channel (FC) service

l Fiber connection (FICON) service

l Enterprise systems connection (ESCON) service

l Digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) service

2.2.8 Service Access CapacityThe capacity of services that the OptiX OSN 3500 can access varies with the type and quantityof the configured boards.

Table 2-2 lists the maximum capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500 for accessing different services.The maximum capacity refers to the maximum number of services that is supported, when onlyone specific type of service is accessed.

Table 2-2 Maximum service access capacity of the OptiX OSN 3500

Service Type Maximum Number of ServicesSupported by a Single Subrack

STM-64 standard or concatenated services 8

STM-64 (FEC) services 4

STM-16 standard or concatenated services 44

STM-16 (FEC) services 8

STM-4 standard or concatenated services 46

STM-1 standard services 204

STM-1 (electrical) services 132

E4 services 32

E3/T3 services 117

E1/T1 services 504

FE services 180

GE services 56

STM-4 ATM services 15

STM-1 ATM services 60

N x 64 kbit/s (N: 1–31) services 64

Framed E1 services 64

ESCON services 44

FICON/FC100 services 22

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 33: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Service Type Maximum Number of ServicesSupported by a Single Subrack

FC200 services 8

DVB-ASI services 44

2.3 InterfaceThe interfaces include service interfaces, administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.3.1 Service InterfacesService interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfacesThe equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.

2.3.1 Service InterfacesService interfaces include SDH service interfaces and PDH service interfaces.

Table 2-3 lists the service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-3 Service interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Interface Description

SDH serviceinterface

STM-1 electrical interfaces: BNC connectorsSTM-1 optical interfaces: I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2STM-4 optical interfaces: I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2STM-16 optical interfaces: I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2, L-16.2Je,V-16.2Je, U-16.2JeSTM-16 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2fSTM-64 optical interfaces: I-64.1, I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2,Ls-64.2, V-64.2bSTM-64 optical interfaces (FEC): Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2eSTM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.692can output fixed wavelength from 191.1 THz to 196.0 THz.

PDH serviceinterface

75/120-ohm E1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors100-ohm T1 electrical interfaces: DB44 connectors75-ohm E3, T3 and E4 electrical interfaces: BNC connectors

Ethernet serviceinterface

10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX

DDN serviceinterface

RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9

Page 34: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Interface Description

ATM serviceinterface

STM-1 ATM optical interfaces: Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2STM-4 ATM optical interfaces: S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2E3 ATM interfaces: E3 ATM services are accessed by the N1PD3/N1PL3/PL3A boardIMA E1 interfaces: IMA E1 services are accessed by the N1PQ1,N1PQM, N2PQ1

Storage areanetwork (SAN)service interface

FC100, FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI service optical interfaces

NOTE

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f, Le-64.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je, Ve-1.2, Ve-4.2 are technicalspecifications defined by Huawei.

2.3.2 Administration and Auxiliary InterfacesThe equipment provides several types of administration and auxiliary interfaces.

Table 2-4 lists the types of administration and auxiliary interfaces provided by the OptiX OSN3500.

Table 2-4 Administration and auxiliary interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

InterfaceType

Description

Administration One remote maintenance interface (OAM)Four broadcast data interfaces (S1–S4)One 64 kbit/s codirectional data path interface (F1)One Ethernet interface for network management (ETH)One administration serial interface (F&f)One extended subrack administration interface (EXT)One commissioning interface (COM)

Orderwireinterface

One orderwire phone interface (PHONE)Two SDH NNI voice interfaces (V1 and V2)Two SDH NNI signaling interfaces (used with two serial interfaces fortransparent transmission of asynchronous data)

Clock interface Two 75-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)Two 120-ohm external clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

Alarm interface 16 alarm input and four alarm output interfaceFour cabinet alarm indicator output interfacesFour cabinet alarm indicator concatenation input interfacesAlarm concatenation input interface

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 35: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

2.4 NetworkingThe OptiX OSN 3500 can be used for several network topologies such as the ring network andthe chain network.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports both separate and hybrid configuration of the following types ofNEs:

l Terminal multiplexer (TM)

l Add/drop multiplexer (ADM)

l Multiple add/drop multiplexer (MADM)

OptiX OSN 3500 can be interconnected with Huawei OSN, DWDM, and Metro equipmentseries, to provide a complete transmission network solution.

NOTE

When the OptiX OSN 3500 is interconnected to other equipment, the paths for transmitting and receivingthe K byte should be consistent.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 can be used with other OptiX OSN equipment to provide a completeASON solution. Such a solution covers all layers including the backbone layer, theconvergence layer, and the access layer.

l Through an SDH interface or a GE interface, the OptiX 3500 can be interconnected toWDM equipment.

l Through an SDH, PDH, Ethernet, ATM, or DDN interface, the OptiX OSN 3500 can beinterconnected to the OptiX Metro equipment.

Table 2-5 lists the networking modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-5 Basic networking modes of the OptiX OSN 3500

Networking Mode Topology

1 Chain

2 Ring

3 Tangent rings

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-11

Page 36: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Networking Mode Topology

4 Intersectingrings

5 Ring withchain

6 DNI

7 Hub

8 Mesh

Legends: MADM ADM TM ASON NE

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 37: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

2.5 Built-in WDM TechnologyThe equipment supports the built-in WDM technology, which enables the transmission of severalwavelengths in one fiber.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the built-in WDM technology, whose functions are described asfollows.

l Any two adjacent standard wavelengths (with 100-GHz spacing) that comply with ITU-TG.694.1 can be added or dropped, with the operating wavelength ranging from 1535.82 nmto 1560.61 nm.

l The optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) station that adds or drops two/four wavelengthsis supported.

l The optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM) station that adds or drops two wavelengths issupported.

l The conversion between client-side signal wavelengths and ITU-T G.692 compliantstandard wavelengths is supported. During the conversion, signals are all transparentlytransmitted.

l Intermediate ports are provided for expansion. When intermediate ports are cascaded withother OADM boards, the expansion of add/drop channels is realized.

l The add/drop carrier wavelengths can be labeled and queried.

l The 3R (regeneration, retiming and reshaping) functions are provided for client-side uplinkand downlink signals (at a rate of 34 Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/s). For these client-side signals,clock recovery is available, and the signal rate can be monitored.

l Dual fed and selective receiving boards support intra-board protection. One board of thistype can be used to realize the optical channel protection, with the protection switchingtime being less than 50 ms.

l Single fed and single receiving boards support inter-board protection. A 1+1 inter-boardstandby scheme is supported, with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms.

l Supports standard CWDM wavelengths, which then can be multiplexed or demultiplexed.

2.6 ROPA SystemThe equipment supports the remote optical pumping amplifier (ROPA) system to transmitsignals in a long distance.

The transmission distance of optical signals is extended if the ROPA system is used in the OptiXOSN 3500 system.

The ROPA system consists of the BA optical amplifier board, ROP board, and filter isolatingboard (FIB). The ROP board receives optical signals from the line side, and sends them to theFIB board for filtering and isolation. The optical signals are then sent to the SF16 board. Thetransmission and amplification of the optical signals are then completed.

Figure 2-6 shows a typical ROPA system.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-13

Page 38: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 2-6 ROPA System

BA17SF16

fiber

铒纤 ROPBASF16

G.652

Erbium

fiber

ROP FIB SF16SF16

G.652

2.7 Intelligent Power AdjustmentThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the IPA function. The IPA function is used to shut down thepump laser when the receiving side of the line board detects no input of signals. Therefore, thedamage to eyes by too much laser power is avoided.

In a transmission system, the optical signals in optical paths may be lost because of a fiber cut,equipment degrade or connector disconnection. To prevent the damage to human bodies,especially eyes, the system provides the IPA function.

When the optical signals in the one or several optical trunk sections of the main optical path arelost, the system detects the signal loss and shuts down the uplink optical amplifier. Severalseconds later, the laser of the downlink optical amplifier is also shut down. When the opticalsignals recover, the optical amplifier resumes working.

2.8 External Clock Output Shutdown FunctionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the external clock output shutdown function.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function of external clock output shutdown. Users can usethe T2000 to issue a command to the cross-connect board to shut down or recover the two externalT4 external clock outputs. Moreover, the current configuration status of the NE software canalso be queried.

When the function is performed, no external clock signals are output. In addition, the softwarecannot automatically recover the clock output unless the T2000 issues a command to disable thefunction.

By default, the external clock output shutdown function is not enabled. In other words, externalclock signals are output by default.

2.9 Extended SubrackThe OptiX OSN 3500 extended subrack supports the access of 504 x E1/T1 services and 24 xE3/T3 services. The extended subrack also supports 1:N (N≤8) TPS protection for E1/T1services and 1:N (N≤3) TPS protection for E3/T3 services.

Each OptiX OSN 3500 subrack supports only one extended subrack. Table 2-6 lists theconfiguration of the extended subrack.

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 39: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 2-6 Configuration of the extended subrack

Subrack Primary Subrack Extended Subrack

Cross-connectand timing board

The N1UXCSB, N1SXCSB orN1IXCSB board is required.1+1hot backup is recommended.

The N1XCE board is required.1+1hot backup is recommended.

SCC The N3GSCC board is required.1+1 hot backup is recommended.

The SCC board needs not beconfigured.

Serviceprocessing board

Service processing boards areconfigured according to theactual demands.

Support N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1,N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A, N1D75S,N1D12S, N1D12B, N1PL3, N1PD3,N1PL3A, N1C34S, N1D34S,N1TSB8, N1TSB4, N1LWX, BA2,BPA, N1DCU, N2DCU.

N1PIU This board is required. 1+1 hotbackup is recommended.

It is required. 1+1 hot backup isrecommended.

N1AUX This board is required. It is required.

FAN This board is required. It is required.

The N1UXCSB board of the main subrack and the N1XCE board of the extended subrack areconnected by two cables to achieve 1+1 protection. The EXT interface on the N1AUX board ofthe main subrack is connected to the "EXT" interface of the N1AUX board of the extendedsubrack to transmit the network management information. When the N1AUX board is used inan extended subrack, the J9 jumper cap of the N1AUX board should be removed.

Figure 2-7 shows the connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack. If theN1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board is used, cables are connected in the same way. Just replace theN1UXCSB board in Figure 2-7 with the N1SXCSB or N1IXCSB board.

Figure 2-7 Connection between the main subrack and the extended subrack

19 20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112

FAN FAN FAN

PIU

PIU

UXC

SB

UXC

SB

AU

XG

SCC

EXB

EXA

EXB

EXA

EXT

GSC

C

FAN FAN FAN

PIU

PIU

XCE

XCE

AU

X

EXB

EXA

EXB

EXA

EXT

Primary subrack Extended subrack

13 14 1516 17 18 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 1516 17 18

21 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 3435 36 37 19 2021 2223 2425 26 27 28 29 3031 3233 3435 36 37

2.10 Board REG FunctionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the board REG function.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-15

Page 40: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of ADM and REG. See Figure 2-8.

Figure 2-8 Hybrid application of ADM and REG

OUT

IN

OUT

IN

REG

SL64 SL64IN

OUT

SL64IN

OUT

SL64

OptiX OSN 3500OUT

IN

SL16 SL16

IN

OUT

SL16

IN

OUT

SL16

PQ1

ADM

OSN3500

OSN3500

OSN3500

OSN3500

OUT

IN

Table 2-7 lists the boards that support the REG function. Table 2-8 lists the types of opticalinterfaces that are supported.

Table 2-7 Boards that support the REG function

Board Slot (40 Gbit/sCross-ConnectCapacity)

Slot (80 Gbit/sCross-ConnectCapacity)

Description

N1SL64,N2SL64 Slots 8, 11 Slots 7–8, 11–12 The T2000 must be used toenable the REG mode ofboards. With the REG modeenabled, the board is in theRS loopback mode and onlyprocesses the regenerationsection overhead and theframe header.

N1SF16 Slots 6–8, 11–13 Slots 5–8, 11–14

N1SF64 Slots 8, 11 Slots 7–8,11–12

N2SL16, N3SL16 Slots 6–8, 11–13 Slots 5–8, 11–14

N3SL16A Slots 6–8, 11–13 Slots 5–8, 11–14

Table 2-8 Optical interfaces for the REG

Board Optical Interface Type

N1SL64, N2SL64 I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2, V-64.2b

N1SF64 Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e

N1SF16 Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f

N2SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

N3SL16 L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 41: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Optical Interface Type

N3SL16A I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2

2.11 ProtectionThe equipment provides equipment level protection and network level protection.

2.11.1 Equipment Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.

2.11.2 Network Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.

2.11.1 Equipment Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides several equipment level protection schemes.

Table 2-9 shows the equipment level protection provided by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-9 Equipment level protection

Object Protected Protection Scheme RevertiveMode

E1/T1 service processing board 1:N (N≤8) TPS Revertive

E3/T3/E4/STM-1(e) serviceprocessing board

1:N (N≤3) TPS Revertive

DDN service processing board 1:N (N≤8) TPS Revertive

Ethernet processing boardsN2EFS0 and N4EFS0

1:1 TPS Revertive

Ethernet processing boardN1EMS4

1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS Non-revertive

Ethernet processing boardN1EGS4

1+1 PPS and 1+1 BPS Non-revertive

ATM service processing board 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive

Cross-connect and timing unit 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive

SCC board 1+1 hot backup Non-revertive

Arbitrary bit rate wavelengthconversion board N1LWX

Intra-board protection (dual-fed andselective receiving) and inter-boardprotection (1+1 hot backup)

Non-revertive

–48 V power interface unit 1+1 hot backup -

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-17

Page 42: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Object Protected Protection Scheme RevertiveMode

NOTEThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports coexistence of three TPS protection groups of different types. With theextended subrack, the OptiX OSN 3500 can support coexistence of six TPS protection groups of differenttypes.

2.11.2 Network Level ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports several network level protection schemes.

Table 2-10 lists the network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 2-10 Network level protection schemes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Network Level Protection Protection Scheme

SDH protection Linear MSP

MSP ring

Subnetwork connection protection (SNCP, SNCMP andSNCTP)

Dual-node interconnection (DNI) protection

Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

Optical-path-shared MSP

Ethernet protection Resilient packet ring (RPR) protection

ATM protection VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

2.12 ASON FeaturesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides a set of stand-alone ASON software system to realize theintelligent management of services and bandwidth resources.

The ASON features help the OptiX OSN 3500 to:

l Support automatic end-to-end service configuration.

l Support service level agreement (SLA).

l Support mesh networking and protection.

l Provide traffic engineering control to guarantee load-balance traffic network wide andimprove the bandwidth availability.

l Provide distributed mesh network protection including real-time rerouting and pre-configuration.

l Support span protection and end-to-end service protection, improving the scalability of thenetwork.

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 43: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

NOTE

The intelligent software system can be bundled with or separated from the OptiX OSN 3500 as required.If not equipped with the intelligent software system, the OptiX OSN 3500 will not support the intelligentfeatures described in this manual.

2.13 TCMThe tandem connection monitor (TCM) is a method used to monitor bit errors.

If a VC-4 passes through several networks, the TCM method can be used to monitor the biterrors of each section.

The N2SLO1, N2SL1, N2SLQ1, N2SL4, N2SLD4, N2SLQ4, N2SL16, N2SL64, N3SL16 andN3SL16A boards support the TCM at the VC-4 level.

2.14 E13/M13 FunctionThe E13/M13 function is performed to multiplex 16×E1/21×T1 signals into one E3/T3 signalor to demultiplex one E3/T3 signal to 16×E1/21×T1 signals. The OptiX OSN 3500 supports theE13/M13 function.

The E13/M13 function has two modes: Transmux and Transmux Server.

These two modes are described in detail as follows:

l The remote NE transmits the E1/E3 or T1/T3 services in VC-12/VC-3 granularities to thecentral NE over the SDH line.

l The central NE disassembles the received services into E1/T1 granularities.– For E1/T1 services, the central NE directly demaps VC-12 signals into E1/T1 signals.

– For E3/T3 services, the central NE first demaps VC-3 signals into E3/T3 signals. TheE13/M13 function is then performed to demultiplex E3/T3 signals into E1/T1 signals.

l The central NE first grooms E1/T1 signals, and then by using the E13/M13 function,aggregates and reassembles these E1/T1 signals to E3/T3 signals. The E3/T3 signals arethen output.– If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to local application equipment through

electrical interfaces, the mode is referred to as the Transmux mode.– If the reassembled E3/T3 signals are output to other transmission equipment over the

SDH line, the mode is referred to as the Transmux Server mode.

2.15 RPRThe RPR is suitable for ring topology and is used to quickly restore services from a fiber cut ora link failure.

The RPR has the following main features:

l Provide the topology auto-discovery function to reflect the network status in real time.

l Support fairness algorithm by configurable weight and support five service levels.

l Support a maximum of 255 nodes in the ring network and support stripping at thedestination node.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-19

Page 44: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l Solve the fairness and congestion control problems.

l Provide RPR protection.

2.16 ETH-OAMWith the development of Ethernet services, the equipment maintainability becomes more andmore important.

When Ethernet is extended to the metropolitan area network (MAN) and the wide area network(WAN), the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) of the transmission networkbecomes a key issue. This brings the emergence of the Ethernet OAM.

The Ethernet OAM has the following functions:

l Automatic fault discovery

l Fault location

l Fault isolation

The Ethernet OAM is realized through the following methods:

l The loopback (LB) test, which is used for a bidirectional continuity check.

l The link trace (LT) test, which is used to locate the faulty point.

l The continuity check, which is used for a unidirectional continuity check.

The Ethernet OAM is implemented in the following process. The maintenance end point (MEP)initiates the fault detection. When detecting the fault, the maintenance intermediate point (MIP)reports alarms, which can be accurately synchronized to the Ethernet trail that is relevant to theMIP.

2.17 Software Package LoadingThe software package loading is performed to upgrade and manage the NE-level software in amass manner. The NE-level software then can be loaded and activated in a mass manner tosimplify the operations to upgrade the NE-level software. Also, you can check if the boardsoftware versions match when the board is in service. Once a board is in service, the boardsoftware versions can be automatically updated.

The software package loading has the following features:

l Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.

l The complete software package is stored on the N3GSCC board. The NE software isdirectly placed in the target directory while the board software is buffered in the CF. In thisway, the board software can be automatically updated after a new board is inserted. If theboard software files are lost, these files can be restored from the N3GSCC board.

l The NE can be automatically managed. If the board that is newly inserted does not matchthe software of the NE, an auto-update is performed.

l The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load only therequired files.

The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 45: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l Upgrade of software of an NE

l Replacement of service boards

l Replacement of the SCC board

l Replacement of the CF card of a board

2.18 Hot FixThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hot fix technology.

Some equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is found or a newrequirement needs to be applied to the equipment software, a process of replacing old codes withnew codes should be performed to fix the defect or realize the new requirement, without anyservice interruption. These new codes are referred to as a hot fix.

The hot fix technology has the following features:

l The hot fix solves most software problems without affecting services.

l The hot fix effectively decreases the number of software versions and avoids frequentsoftware version upgrade.

l The hot fix operation does not affect services and can be performed remotely. The hot fixalso provides a rollback function. All these help to lower the upgrade cost and to avoidupgrade risks.

l The hot fix can be used as an effective method for locating faults, and thus improves theefficiency of solving problems.

2.19 Inter-Board Alarm SuppressionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the suppression of tributary/data board alarms that are raised asa result of the alarms on the line board.

When there are cross-connections between a line board and a tributary/data board, many alarmsare raised on the tributary/data board if alarms are raised on the line board. These alarms are allreported to the T2000. Such a large number of alarms can disturb the troubleshooting and affectthe problem solution efficiency. Therefore, the inter-board alarm suppression function is usedto solve this problem.

If there are services from the line board to the tributary/data board in the same NE, and if higherorder alarms are raised on the line board, relevant lower order alarms on the tributary/data boardare suppressed.

If alarms are relevant to the tributary/data board only (which means the line board at the servicesource does not generate higher order alarms), the alarms on the tributary/data board are notsuppressed. In this case, these alarms are reported to the T2000 and are not be mistakenlysuppressed.

2.20 PRBS FunctionThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) test function.

The PRBS function is mainly used for network self-test and maintenance. An NE that providesthe PRBS function can work as a simple device used to analyze if a service path is faulty. Such

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-21

Page 46: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

analysis can be performed for both the NE itself and the entire network. During deployment ortroubleshooting, the PRBS function realizes the test without a real test device.

The PRBS function has the following two types:

l If the PRBS function is used for lower order services, the PRBS module is integrated on atributary board.

l If the PRBS function is used for higher order services, the PRBS module is integrated ona line board or a cross-connect board.

The PRBS function is implemented in the following process:

l For the opposite tributary or line of a path to be tested, the user issues a loopback commandon the T2000.

l On the T2000, the user issues a command to enable the PRBS function for this path.

l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board performs the PRBS function and starts thestatistics.

l The tributary, line, or cross-connect board reports the PRBS test result.

l The user queries the PRBS statistics result.

l The user releases the loopback of the path on the opposite tributary or line board.

2.21 Board Version ReplacementThe board version replacement function replaces an old version board with a new version board.After the replacement, the configuration and service status of the new version board areconsistent with those of the old version board.

This function provides a flexible board replacement scheme, and thus lowers the equipment costand the maintenance cost.

Currently for OptiX OSN 3500, the board version replacement function is supported by theN1SXCSA, N1SXCSB, N1SL64, N3SL16, N3SL16A, N2PQ1, N2PD3, N2PL3, N2PL3A,N2EFS0, N4EFS0, N2EGS2 and N2EFS4.

For detailed replacement relations of boards that support this function, refer to the OptiX OSN3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Troubleshooting.

When using the board version replacement function, note the following two points:

l The new board may not support the functions of the original board. Before the replacement,fully consider the difference of the two boards in functions. For example, If the N2SL64board is configured with the TCM function or AU-3 services, it cannot be replaced withthe N1SL64 board.

l The line board to be replaced cannot have optical-path-shared MSP configured.

2.22 OAM Information InterworkingOptiX OSN 3500 supports OAM information interworking.

Any of the following three methods can be adopted for the OptiX OSN 3500 to transparentlytransmit the OAM information of third-party equipment, or for the third-party equipment totransparently transmit the OAM information of the OptiX OSN 3500.

2 FunctionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

2-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 47: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l HWECC

l IP over DCC

l OSI over DCC

2.23 ClockThe OptiX OSN equipment supports the clock functions.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock functions:

l SSM clock protocol

l Tributary retiming

l Two 75-ohm/120-ohm external clock output and input

l Line clock source

l Tributary clock source

l Three working modes– Tracing mode

– Hold-over mode

– Free-run mode

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 2 Function

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-23

Page 48: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 49: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

3 Hardware

About This Chapter

3.1 OverviewThe OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards.

3.2 CabinetThe cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A powersupply box is on the top of the cabinet to access –48 V or –60 V power.

3.3 SubrackThe subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.

3.4 BoardsThe equipment supports different types of boards.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1

Page 50: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

3.1 OverviewThe OptiX OSN 3500 equipment consists of the cabinet, subrack and boards.

Figure 3-1 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment

Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment

Subrack

Board

Cabinet

3.2 CabinetThe cabinet that complies with the ETSI standards is used for the OptiX OSN 3500. A powersupply box is on the top of the cabinet to access –48 V or –60 V power.

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 51: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 3-2 shows an ETSI cabinet that is 300 mm deep.

Figure 3-2 Appearance of the ETSI cabinet

W

H

D

Table 3-1 lists the technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets.

Table 3-1 Technical specifications of the ETSI cabinets

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Allowed SubrackQuantity

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H) 55 1

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H) 79 1

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H) 60 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H) 84 2

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3

Page 52: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Allowed SubrackQuantity

600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H) 70 2

600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H) 94 2

NOTEAll dimensions are in mm. The following figure shows the directions of the width, the depth and the height.

W

H

D

3.3 SubrackThe subrack consists of slots and boards that can be configured.

3.3.1 Subrack StructureThe OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot areafor processing boards, slot area for interface boards, fan area and fiber routing area.

3.3.2 Slot AllocationThe OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper tier,where 19 slots are present, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slotsare present, is the slot area for processing boards.

3.3.3 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the subrack cover the subrack dimensions and weight.

3.3.1 Subrack StructureThe OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is of a two-layer structure. The subrack consists of the slot areafor processing boards, slot area for interface boards, fan area and fiber routing area.

Figure 3-3 shows the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 53: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 3-3 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

1

2

3

4

W

H

D

1. Slot area for interface boards 2. Fan area 3. Slot area for processing boards 4. Fiber routing area

The functions of these areas are as follows.

l Slot area for interface boards: This area is used to house the interface boards for the OptiXOSN 3500.

l Fan area: This area is used to house three fan modules, which dissipate heat generated bythe equipment.

l Slot area for processing boards: This area is used to house the processing boards for theOptiX OSN 3500.

l Fiber routing area: This area is used to route fibers in the subrack.

3.3.2 Slot AllocationThe OptiX OSN 3500 subrack consists of the upper layer and the lower layer. The upper tier,where 19 slots are present, is the slot area for interface boards. The lower layer, where 18 slotsare present, is the slot area for processing boards.

Figure 3-4 shows the slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5

Page 54: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 3-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Fiber Routing

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SLOT5

SLOT6

SLOT7

SLOT8

SLOT9

SLOT10

SLOT11

SLOT12

SLOT13

SLOT14

SLOT15

SLOT16

SLOT17

SLOT18

SLOT27

SLOT19

SLOT20

SLOT21

SLOT22

SLOT23

SLOT24

SLOT25

SLOT26

SLOT37

SLOT29

SLOT30

SLOT31

SLOT32

SLOT33

SLOT34

SLOT36

SLOT35

SLOT28

PIU

PIU

AUX

SCC

SCC

XCS

XCS

G G

SLOT 38FAN

SLOT 39FAN

SLOT 40FAN

Slot Area for Interface BoardsSlots for interface boards: slots 19–26 and 29–36

Slot Area for Processing BoardsSlots for processing boards: slots 1–8 and 11–17

Other Slotsl Slots for cross-connect and timing boards: slots 9–10

l Slots for SCC boards: slots 17–18 (slot 17 can also house a processing board)

l Slots for PIU boards: slots 27–28

l Slot for the auxiliary interface board: slot 37

l Slots for fan boards: slots 38–40

Mapping Relation Between Slots for Interface Boards and Slots for ProcessingBoards

Table 3-2 lists the mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processingboards.

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 55: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 3-2 Mapping relation between slots for interface boards and slots for processing boards

Slots forProcessingBoards

Slots for InterfaceBoards

Slots forProcessingBoards

Slots for InterfaceBoards

Slot 2 Slots 19 and 20 Slot 3 Slots 21 and 22

Slot 4 Slots 23 and 24 Slot 5 Slots 25 and 26

Slot 13 Slots 29 and 30 Slot 14 Slots 31 and 32

Slot 15 Slots 33 and 34 Slot 16 Slots 35 and 36

Boards and Their Valid SlotsTable 3-3 lists the boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-3 Boards and their valid slots for the OptiX OSN 3500

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1GXCSA Cross-connect and timingboard

Slots 9–10

N1EXCSA Enhanced cross-connect andtiming board

Slots 9–10

N1UXCSA Greatly enhanced cross-connect and timing board

Slots 9–10

N1UXCSB Greatly enhanced cross-connect and timing board

Slots 9–10

N1SXCSA Greatly enhanced cross-connect and timing board

Slots 9–10

N1SXCSB Greatly enhanced cross-connect and timing board

Slots 9–10

N1XCE Lower order cross-connect andtiming board for the extendedsubrack

Slots 59–60

N1GSCC SCC board Slots 17–18

N3GSCC SCC board Slots 17–18

N1IXCSA Infinitetly enhanced cross-connect and timing board

Slots 9–10

N1IXCSB Infinitetly enhanced cross-connect and timing board

Slots 9–10

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7

Page 56: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SL64 1 x STM-64 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11

N2SL64 1 x STM-64 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11

N1SF64 1 x STM-64 optical interfaceboard (with FEC)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11

N1SLD64 2 x STM-64 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and11–12

N3SL16A 1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 57: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13

N2SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13

N3SL16 1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13

N1SF16 1 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard (with FEC)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13

N1SLD16 2 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 7–8 and 11–12Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 8 and 11

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9

Page 58: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (for the board housed in any ofslots 1–4 and 15–16, two opticalinterfaces can be configured), and slots5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housedin any of slots 5–8 and 11–14, fouroptical interfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–4 and 15–16, two optical interfacescan be configured), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (for the board housed in any ofslots 5–8 and 11–14, four opticalinterfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–5 and 14–16, one optical interfacecan be configured), and slots 6–8 and11–13 (for the board housed in any ofslots 6–8 and 11–13, four opticalinterfaces can be configured)

N2SLQ4 4 x STM-4 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (for the board housed in any ofslots 1–4 and 15–16, two opticalinterfaces can be configured), and slots5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housedin any of slots 5–8 and 11–14, fouroptical interfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–4 and 15–16, two optical interfacescan be configured), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (for the board housed in any ofslots 5–8 and 11–14, four opticalinterfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–5 and 14–16, one optical interfacecan be configured), and slots 6–8 and11–13 (for the board housed in any ofslots 6–8 and 11–13, four opticalinterfaces can be configured)

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 59: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–5 and 14–16, one optical interfacecan be configured), and slots 6–8 and11–13 (for the board housed in any ofslots 6–8 and 11–13, two opticalinterfaces can be configured)

N2SLD4 2 x STM-4 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–5 and 14–16, one optical interfacecan be configured), and slots 6–8 and11–13 (for the board housed in any ofslots 6–8 and 11–13, two opticalinterfaces can be configured)

N1SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N2SL4 1 x STM-4 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11

Page 60: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SLT1 12 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (for the board housed in any ofslots 1–4 and 15–16, 1–8 opticalinterfaces can be configured), and slots5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housedin any of slots 5–8 and 11–14, 1–12optical interfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–4 and 15–16, 1–8 optical interfacescan be configured), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (for the board housed in any ofslots 5–8 and 11–14, 1–12 opticalinterfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–5 and 14–16, 1–4 optical interfacescan be configured), and slots 6–8 and11–13 (for the board housed in any ofslots 6–8 and 11–13, 1–12 opticalinterfaces can be configured)

N1SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N2SLQ1 4 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 61: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N2SL1 1 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1SLH1 16 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and13–16 (for the board housed in any ofslots 2–5 and 13–16, 16 opticalinterfaces can be configured)

N2SLQ16 4 x STM-16 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (for the board housed in any ofslots 1–4 and 15–16, two opticalinterfaces can be configured), and slots5–8 and 11–14 (for the board housedin any of slots 5–8 and 11–14, fouroptical interfaces can be configured)

N1SEP1 2 x STM-1 line processingboard (without the interfaceboard)

Slots 1–6 and 13–16

N1SEP 8 x STM-1 line processingboard (with the interface board)

Slots 2–5 and 13–16

N1EU08 8 x STM-1 electrical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23,25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

N1EU04 4 x STM-1 electrical interfaceboard

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13

Page 62: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1OU08 (LC) 8 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23,25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

N2OU08 (SC) 8 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23,25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

N1TSB8 8-channel electrical interfaceswitching board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35,36, 69, and 85Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35,36, 69, and 85Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19, 20, 35and 36

N1TSB4 4-channel electrical interfaceswitching board

Slots 19 and 35

N2SLO1 8 x STM-1 optical interfaceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (for the board housed in any ofslots 1–8 and 11–17, eight opticalinterfaces can be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (for the board housed in any of slots1–8 and 11–17, eight optical interfacescan be configured)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (for the board housed in any of slots1–5 and 14–16, four optical interfacescan be configured), and slots 6–8 and11–13 (for the board housed in any ofslots 6–8 and 11–13, eight opticalinterfaces can be configured)

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 63: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1PQ1A 63 x E1 75-ohm processingboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and13–16 (slots in the extended subrack:slots 51–55 and 63–66)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots51–55 and 63–66)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16

N1PQ1B 63 x E1 120-ohm processingboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and13–16 (slots in the extended subrack:slots 51–55 and 63–66)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots51–55 and 63–66)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16

N1MU04 4 x E4/STM-1 electricalinterface board

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

N1PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16, 52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16,52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16

N2PL3 3 x E3/T3 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16, 52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16,52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15

Page 64: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16, 52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16,52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16

N2PD3 6 x E3/T3 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16, 52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5, 13–16,52–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16

N2PQ3 12 x E3/T3 processing board Slots 2–5 and 13–16

N1PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board(without the interface board)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N2PL3A 3 x E3/T3 processing board(without the interface board)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1SPQ4 4 x E1/STM-1 processing board Slots 2–5 and 13–16

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 65: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1C34S 3 x E3/T3 electrical interfaceswitching board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23,25, 29, 31, 33, 35, 69, 71, 73, 75, 79,81, 83, and 85Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23,25, 29, 31, 33, 35, 69, 71, 73, 75, 79,81, 83, and 85Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19, 21, 23,25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

N1D34S 6 x E3/T3 electrical interfaceswitching board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36

N2PQ1 63 x E1 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and13–16 (slots in the extended subrack:slots 51–55 and 63–66)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16 (slots in the extended subrack: slots51–55 and 63–66)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16

N1PQM 63 x E1/T1 processing board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–5, 13–16, 51–31, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–5, 13–16,51–31, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 13–16

N2SPQ4 4 x E4/STM-1 processing board Slots 2–5 and 13–16

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17

Page 66: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1D75S 32 x E1 electrical interfaceswitching board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36

N1D12S 32 x E1/T1 electrical interfaceswitching board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36

N1D12B 32 x E1/T1 electrical interfaceswitching board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36

N1EGT2 2 x GE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EFT8(without theinterface board)

8 x FE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Slots 1–6 and 13–16 (622 Mbit/s)

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 67: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EFT8 (withthe interfaceboard)

8 x FE Ethernet transparenttransmission board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slot when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 13 (1.25Gbit/s)

N1EFF8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet opticalinterface board

Slots 19–26 and 29–36

N1ETF8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twistedpair interface board

Slots 19–26 and 29–36

N1EFT8A 8 x FE transparent transmissionboard (without the interfaceboard)

Slots 1–8 and 11–16 (622 Mbit/s)

N1EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processingboard with Lanswitch

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N2EGS2 2 x GE Ethernet processingboard with Lanswitch

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-19

Page 68: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EFS4 4 x FE Ethernet board withLanswitch

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (622 Mbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (622 Mbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16 (622 Mbit/s)

N2EFS4 4 x FE processing board(without the interface board)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processingboard with Lanswitch

Slots 2–5 and 13–16 (622 Mbit/s)

N2EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processingboard with Lanswitch

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N4EFS0 8 x FE Ethernet processingboard with Lanswitch

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 13–16 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1ETS8 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twistedpair interface board

Slots 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 31, 33, and 35

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 69: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EMS4 (withthe interfaceboard)

4 x GE and 16 x GE Ethernettransparent transmission andconvergence board (with theinterface board)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 5 and 13–14(2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EMS4(without theinterface board)

4 x GE and 16 x FE Ethernettransparent transmission andconvergence board (without theinterface board)

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–6 and13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–6 and 13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5Gbit/s)

N1EGS4 4 x GE Ethernet transparenttransmission and convergenceboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-21

Page 70: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1EMR0 (withthe interfaceboard)

1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernetboard with RPR

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 13–14(2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1EMR0(without theinterface board)

1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernetboard with RPR

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–6 and13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–6 and 13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5Gbit/s)

N2EMR0 (withthe interfaceboard)

1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernetboard with RPR

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 2–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5 and 13–14(2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 2–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slot 13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 71: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N2EMR0(without theinterface board)

1 x GE and 12 x FE Ethernetboard with RPR

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 5–6 and13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–6 and 13–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6 and 13 (2.5Gbit/s)

N2EGR2 2 x GE Ethernet ring processingboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slots 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1ADL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processingboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1ADQ1 1 x STM-4 ATM processingboard

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 6–8 and 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-23

Page 72: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1IDL4 1 x STM-4 ATM processingboard with IMA

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1IDQ1 4 x STM-1 ATM processingboard with IMA

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17 (1.25 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (1.25 Gbit/s)

N1MST4 4-port multiservice transparenttransmission board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 5–8 and11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–4 and 15–16 (1.25 Gbit/s), and slot 5–8 and 11–14 (2.5 Gbit/s)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–5 and 14–16 (622 Mbit/s), and slots 6–8 and 11–13 (2.5 Gbit/s)

N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/s access andconvergence board

Slots 1–5 and 13–16

N1DXA N x 64 kbit/s convergence andprocessing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1DM12 N x 64 kbit/s interface board Slots 19–26 and 29–36

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 73: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1LWX Wavelength converting board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–55, and 63–66Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 19–26, 29–36, 69–76, and 79–86Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 19–26 and29–36

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-25

Page 74: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17

TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/dropmultiplexing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17

TN11CMR2 2-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17

TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexing board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–17

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 75: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1BA2 Optical booster amplifier board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1BPA 1-channel amplifier and 1-channel preamplifier board

Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1DCU Dispersion compensation board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N2DCU Dispersion compensation board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

N1COA/61COA/62COA

Case-shaped optical amplifier Slots 101–102

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-27

Page 76: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Valid Slots

N1AUX System auxiliary interfaceboard

Valid slot when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slot 87in the extended subrack)Valid slot when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slot 37 (slot 87 inthe extended subrack)Valid slot when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slot 37

N1PIU PIU board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 27–28(slots 77–78 in the extended subrack)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 27–28 (slots77–78 in the extended subrack)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 27 and 28

N1FAN Fan board Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 38–40(slots 88–90 in the extended subrack)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 38–40 (slots88–90 in the extended subrack)Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 38 and 40

N1FANA Fan board Slots 38–40

N1FIB Filter isolating board (passive) Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 200 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17, 51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 80 Gbit/s: slots 1–8, 11–17,51–58, and 61–67Valid slots when the cross-connectcapacity is 40 Gbit/s: slots 1–8 and 11–16

ROP Single wavelength long-haulboard (external)

Slot 103

NOTEThe slots for the N1COA, 61COA, 62COA, and ROP are logical slots rather than physical slots.

3.3.3 Technical SpecificationsThe technical specifications of the subrack cover the subrack dimensions and weight.

Table 3-4 lists the technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 77: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack

Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg)

497 (W) x 295 (D) x 722 (H) 23 (net weight of the subrack without anyboard or fan)

3.4 BoardsThe equipment supports different types of boards.

3.4.1 Board TypeThe OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units.

3.4.2 SDH Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.

3.4.3 PDH Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.

3.4.4 DDN Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards.

3.4.5 Data Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards.

3.4.6 WDM BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards.

3.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.

3.4.8 Auxiliary BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.

3.4.1 Board TypeThe OptiX OSN 3500 consists of some units.

The OptiX OSN 3500 consists of the following untis:

l SDH interface unit

l PDH interface unit

l DDN interface unit

l Ethernet interface unit

l Resilient packet ring unit

l ATM interface unit

l SAN interface unit

l WDM unit

l SDH cross-connect matrix unit

l Synchronous timing unit

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-29

Page 78: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l SCC unit

l Overhead processing unit

l Power input unit

l Auxiliary interface unit

l Fan unit

Figure 3-5 shows the system architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-5 lists the constituent boards and functions of each unit.

Figure 3-5 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

STM-N OpticalSignal

PDH SignalEthernet Signal

ATM Signal

Cro

ss C

onne

ctM

atrix

SD

H In

terfa

ceU

nit

Ove

rhea

dP

roce

ssin

gU

nit

Syn

chro

nous

timin

g U

nit

Aux

iliar

yIn

terfa

ce U

nit

SC

C U

nit

SD

H/P

DH

/Eth

erne

t/A

TM/D

DN

Inte

rface

boar

d

Table 3-5 Constituent boards and functions of each unit

Unit Constituent Board Function

SDH interfaceunit

Processing board N1SL64, N2SL64,N1SLD64, N1SF64,N1SF16, N2SLQ16,N1SL16, N2SL16,N3SL16, N3SL16A,N1SLD16, N1SLQ4,N2SLQ4, N1SLD4,N2SLD4, N1SL4, N2SL4,N1SLH1, N2SLO1,N1SLT1, N1SLQ1,N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N2SL1,N1SEP1, N1SEP

Access and processSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64optical signals andVC-4-4c/VC-4-16c/VC-4-64c concatenatedoptical signals.Access and processSTM-16/64 opticalsignals with FEC.Access and processSTM-1 electricalsignals, and conductsTPS protection forthem.

Interface board N1EU08, N1OU08,N2OU08, N1EU04

Protectionswitching board

N1TSB8, N1TSB4

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 79: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Unit Constituent Board Function

PDH interfaceunit

Processing board N1SPQ4, N2SPQ4,N1PD3, N2PD3, N1PL3,N2PL3, N2PL3A,N1PL3A, N1PQ1, N2PQ3,N1PQM, N2PQ1

Access and process E1/T1, E3/T3 and E4/STM-1 PDH electricalsignals, and provideTPS protection forthem.

Interface board N1MU04, N1D34S,N1C34S, N1D75S,N1D12S, N1D12B

Protectionswitching board

N1TSB8, N1TSB4

DDN interfaceunit

Processing board N1DX1, N1DXA Access and process N x64 kbit/s (N: 1–31)signals and framed E1signals. Cross-connectthe N x 64 kbit/s signalsat the system side andprovide TPS protectionfor them.

Interface board DM12

Ethernetinterface unit

Processing board N1EGS2, N2EGS2,N1EGT2, N1EFS0,N2EFS0, N4EFS0,N1EFS4, N2EFS4,N1EFT8, EFT8A,N1EMS4, N1EGS4

Access and process1000Base-SX/LX/ZX,100Base-FX, and10/100Base-TXEthernet signals.

Interface board N1ETS8 (with the TPSfunction), N1ETF8,N1EFF8

Protectionswitching board

N1TSB8 Provide TPS protectionfor Ethernet services ofthe N2EFS0 and theN4EFS0 boards.

RPR unit Processing board N1EMR0, N2EMR0,N2EGR2

Access and process1000Base-SX/LX/ZX,100Base-FX, and10/100Base-TXEthernet signals.Support RPR features.

Interface board N1ETF8, N1EFF8

ATM interface unit N1ADL4, N1ADQ1,N1IDL4, N1IDQ1

Access and processSTM-4, STM-1, E3 andIMA E1 ATM signals.

SAN interface unit N1MST4 Access andtransparently transmitSAN services and videoservices.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-31

Page 80: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Unit Constituent Board Function

WDM unit N1MR2A, N1MR2C,TN11MR2, TN11MR4,TN11CMR2, TN11CMR4

Add/drop and multiplexany two adjacentwavelengths.

N1LWX Access signals atarbitrary bit rates (34Mbit/s to 2.7 Gbit/sNRZ-coded signals).Convert client-sidewavelengths to standardwavelengths that arecompliant with ITU-TG.692.

ROP, N1FIB The N1FIB board filtersand isolates the opticalsignals output from theROP board.

SDH cross-connect matrix unitSynchronous timing unit

N1SXCSA, N1SXCSB,N1GXCSA, N1EXCSA,N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB,N1XCEb

Cross-connect SDH andPDH signals.Provide system clockfor the equipment.

SCC unitOverhead processing unit

N1GSCC, N3GSCC Perform the systemcontrol andcommunicationfunction.Process overhead ofSDH signals.

Power interface unit N1PIU Access power supplyand protect theequipment againstabnormal power.

Auxiliary interface unit N1AUX Provide variousadministration andmaintenance interfaces.

Fan unit N1FAN, N1FANA Dissipate heat for thesystem.

Optical boosteramplifier anddispersioncompensationunit

Optical amplifierboard

TN11OBU1, N1BA2,N1BPA, 61COA, N1COA,62COA

Amplify and pre-amplify the opticalpower.

Dispersioncompensationboard

N1DCU, N2DCU Compensate dispersionfor STM-64 opticalsignals.

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 81: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

3.4.2 SDH Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the SDH processing boards.

Table 3-6 lists the SDH processing boards for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-6 SDH processing boards

Board InterfacingMode

Interface Type Connector

N1SL64 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2,V-64.2b

LC

N2SL64 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2,V-64.2b

LC

N1SF64 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

Ue-64.2c, Ue-64.2d, Ue-64.2e LC

N1SLD64 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-64.1, S-64.2b LC

N1SLD16 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC

N1SF16 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, Ue-16.2f LC

N2SLQ16 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC

N1SL16 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je LC

N2SL16 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je LC

N3SL16 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

L-16.2, L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je, U-16.2Je LC

N3SL16A Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2 LC

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-33

Page 82: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board InterfacingMode

Interface Type Connector

N1SLQ4 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N2SLQ4 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SLD4 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N2SLD4 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SL4 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N2SL4 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, Ve-4.2 LC

N1SLT1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

S-1.1 LC

N1SLH1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

- LC

N1SLQ1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N2SLQ1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1SL1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N2SL1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

N1SEP1a Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electrical interface BNC

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-34 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 83: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board InterfacingMode

Interface Type Connector

N1SEPa 8 x STM-1 lineprocessingboard:N1OU08

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 LC

8 x STM-1 lineprocessingboard:N2OU08

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1 SC

8 x STM-1 lineprocessingboard:N1EU08

75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface BNC

N2SLO1 Interfacesavailable onthe front panel

I-1, Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, Ve-1.2 LC

a: The N1SEP1 and N1SEP are the boards of the same type. When they are used with theinterface board, they are displayed as "N1SEP" on the T2000. When they provide interfaceson the front panel, they are displayed as "N1SEP1" on the T2000.

3.4.3 PDH Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the PDH processing boards.

Table 3-7 shows the PDH processing boards and their valid slots of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-7 PDH processing boards

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 xelectrical interface board:N1MU04

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electricalinterface

BNC

N2SPQ4 Interfaces available on the 4 xelectrical interface board:N1MU04

75-ohm E4/STM-1 electricalinterface

BNC

N1PD 6 x electrical interface switchingboard: N1D34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

N2PD3 6 x electrical interface switchingboard: N1D34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

N1PL3 3 x electrical interface switchingboard: N1C34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-35

Page 84: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1PL3A Interfaces available on the frontpanel

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

N2PL3 3 x electrical interface switchingboard: N1C34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

N2PL3A Interfaces available on the frontpanel

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

N2PQ3 6 x electrical interface switchingboard: N1D34S

75-ohm E3/T3 electricalinterface

BNC

N1PQ1A Interfaces available on the 32-channel 75-ohm electricalinterface switching board:N1D75S

75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1PQ1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm electricalinterface switching board:N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface DB44

N1PQM Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm electricalinterface switching board:N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface, 100-ohm T1 interface

DB44

N2PQ1A nterfaces available on the 32-channel 75-ohm electricalinterface switching board:N1D75S

75-ohm E1 interface DB44

N2PQ1B Interfaces available on the 32-channel 120-ohm electricalinterface switching board:N1D12S

120-ohm E1 interface DB44

3.4.4 DDN Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN processing boards.

Table 3-8 lists the DDN processing boards.

Table 3-8 DDN processing boards

Board Full Name Interfacing Mode Interface TypeConnector

N1DX1 N x 64 kbit/sservice access andconvergenceboard

Interfaces availableon the N x 64 kbit/sinterface boardN1DM12

RS232, RS449,EIA530, EIA530-A,V.35, V.24, X.21,Framed E1

DB28,DB44

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-36 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 85: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Full Name Interfacing Mode Interface TypeConnector

N1DXA N x 64 kbit/sserviceconvergenceboard

None None None

3.4.5 Data Processing BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports data processing boards.

Table 3-9 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-9 Data processing boards and their interfaces

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1EGS2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

N2EGS2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

N1EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet twisted pair interface boardN1ETF8

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet optical interface board,N1EFF8

100Base-FX LC

N2EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet twisted pair interface boardN1ETF8

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet optical interface board,N1EFF8

100Base-FX LC

N4EFS0 Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet twisted pair interface boardN1ETF8

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet optical interface board,N1EFF8

100Base-FX LC

N1EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX RJ-45

N2EFS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX RJ-45

N1EGT2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-37

Page 86: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Interfacing Mode Interface Type Connector

N1EFT8 Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet twisted pair interface board,N1ETF8

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet optical interface board,N1EFF8

100Base-FX LC

N1EFT8A Interfaces available on the front panel 10/100Base-TX RJ-45

N1EMS4 Interfaces available on the front paneland the 8 x 10/100M Ethernet twistedpair interface board, N1ETF8

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet optical interface board,N1EFF8

100Base-FX,1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

N1EGS4 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

N1EMR0andN2EMR0

Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet twisted pair interface board,N1ETF8

10/100Base-TX RJ-45

Interfaces available on the 8 x 10/100MEthernet optical interface board,N1EFF8

100Base-FX LC

N2EGR2 Interfaces available on the front panel 1000Base-SX/LX/ZX

LC

N1ADL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,Ve-4.2

LC

N1ADQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,L-1.2, Ve-1.2

LC

N1IDL4 Interfaces available on the front panel S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,Ve-4.2

LC

N1IDQ1 Interfaces available on the front panel Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1,L-1.2, Ve-1.2

LC

N1MST4 Interfaces available on the front panel - LC

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-38 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 87: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

3.4.6 WDM BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports WDM boards.

Table 3-10 lists the WDM boards for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-10 WDM boards and theri interfaces

Board Full Name Interface Type

N1MR2A 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board LC

N1MR2B 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board LC

N1MR2C 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board LC

N1LWX Arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion board LC

TN11MR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board LC

TN11MR4 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board LC

TN11CMR2 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board LC

TN11CMR4 4-channel CWDM optical add/drop multiplexingboard

LC

3.4.7 Optical Booster Amplifier BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports several optical amplifier boards.

Table 3-11 lists the optical booster amplifier boards for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-11 Optical booster amplifier boards and their interfaces

Board Full Name Interface Type

N1BA2 Optical booster amplifier board LC

N1BPA Optical booster and pre-amplifier board LC

61COA Case-shaped erbium doped fiber amplifier unit SC

N1COA Case-shaped single-channel pre-amplifier unit SC

62COA Case-shaped fiber Raman amplifier unit SC, E2000

N1DCU,N2DCU

Dispersion compensation unit LC

ROP Remote optical pumping board LC

N1FIB Wavelength filter and isolating board (passive, usedwith the ROP)

LC, E2000

TN11OBU1 Optical booster amplifier board LC

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 3 Hardware

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-39

Page 88: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

3.4.8 Auxiliary BoardsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports auxiliary boards.

Table 3-12 lists the auxiliary boards for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 3-12 Auxiliary boards and theri interfaces

Board Full Name Interface Type

N1PIU Power interface unit None

N1FAN Fan control board None

N1FANA Full-speed fan board None

N1AUX System auxiliary interface andorderwire phone processing board

BNC, RJ-45

3 HardwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

3-40 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 89: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

4 Software

About This Chapter

The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 includes NE software and board software.

4.1 OverviewThe software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure.

4.2 Board SoftwareThe board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation ofthe board.

4.3 NE SoftwareThe NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE.The NE software also serves as the communication unit between the T2000 system and theboards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs.

4.4 T2000 SystemThe OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission networkmanagement system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).

4.5 ASON SoftwareAccording to ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Software

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1

Page 90: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

4.1 OverviewThe software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is of a modular structure.

The software system includes the following modules:

l Board software (residing in each relevant board)

l NE software (residing in the SCC board)

l T2000 software (residing on a T2000 computer)

l ASON software (contained in the NE software)

The software system of the OptiX OSN 3500 is as shown in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1 Software system structure of the OptiX OSN 3500

T2000 software

Board software

NE software ASONsoftware

NOTE

The ASON software can interact with the T2000 software directly, but it needs the NE software as a vehicleto intercommunicate with the board software.

4.2 Board SoftwareThe board software runs on each board, and manages, monitors and controls the operation ofthe board.

The board software receives the commands issued by the NE software and reports the boardstatus to the NE software in the form of performance events and alarms.

The board software functions include alarm management, performance management,configuration management, and communication management. The board software directlycontrols the functional modules in a board and implements specific NE functions that arecompliant with ITU-T Recommendations. The board software provides support for themanagement of boards performed by the NE software.

The board software is mainly classified into the line software, the tributary software, the cross-connect software, the data board software, the clock software, and the orderwire software.

4 SoftwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

4-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 91: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

4.3 NE SoftwareThe NE software is used to manage, monitor and control the operation of the boards of an NE.The NE software also serves as the communication unit between the T2000 system and theboards. Through the NE software, the T2000 system can control and manage NEs.

In compliance with ITU-T M.3010, the NE software belongs to the element management layerin the telecommunications management network (TMN), and provides NE functions, somecoordination functions, and operations system functions at the network element layer. The datacommunication function implements the communication between the NE and other components(including equipment, the T2000 system, and other NEs).

The NE software consists of the following modules:

l Real-time multitask operating system

l Network side (NS) module

l Equipment administration module (AM)

l Communication module

l Database management module

Real-Time Multitask Operating SystemThe real-time multitask operating system of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE software is responsiblefor the management of public resources and provides support for the execution of applications.This system provides an application execution environment that is independent of the processorhardware, to separate applications from the processor.

Network Side (NS) ModuleThe NS module is between the communication module and the equipment management module.It converts the data format between the user operation side (at the application layer) and the NEequipment management layer, and provides security control for the NE layer.

Functionally, the NS module is divided into the following three submodules:

l Qx interface module

l Command line interface module

l Security management module

Equipment Administration Module (AM)The equipment AM is the kernel of the NE software for implementing NE management, andincludes the Manager and the Agent. The Manager sends network management operationcommands and receives event information. The Agent responds to the network managementoperation commands sent by the Manager, performs operations to managed objects, and reportsevents according to the status change of the managed objects.

The equipment AM includes the configuration management module, the performancemanagement module, the alarm management module, and the MSP switching managementmodule.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Software

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3

Page 92: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Communication Module

The communication module fulfills the message communication function (MCF) of thefunctional blocks of the transmission network equipment. Through the hardware interfaceprovided by the SCC board, the communication module transmits the OAM&P information andexchanges management information between the T2000 system and NEs, and between NEsthemselves. This module consists of the network communication module, the serialcommunication module, and the ECC communication module.

Database Management Module

The database management module is an integral component of the NE software, and consists ofthe data and the management system. The database, organized as a relational database, includesthe network database, alarm database, performance database, and equipment database. Themanagement system manages and accesses the data in the database.

4.4 T2000 SystemThe OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission networkmanagement system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000).

The OptiX iManager T2000 is used as a network management system to implement a uniformmanagement of the optical transmission network, and to maintain all OSN, SDH, Metro, DWDMequipment in the network. In compliance with ITU-T Recommendations, the T2000 adopts astandard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. TheT2000 exchanges information with the NE software through the communication module, toimplement monitoring and management over the network equipment.

The T2000 software manages OptiX equipment through the Qx interface, which adopts amanagement protocol specially designed for the OptiX equipment.

The T2000 software runs on a workstation or a PC. The T2000 enables the user not only tooperate and maintain transmission equipment, but also to manage the transmission network.

l Alarm management

The T2000 realizes the following alarm management functions: real-time collection, prompting,filtering, browsing, acknowledgement, check, clearing, counting, alarm insertion, alarmcorrelation analysis, and fault diagnosis.

l Performance management

The T2000 realizes the setting of performance monitoring, and enables the user to browse,analyze, and print performance data. The medium-term and long-term performance forecast andthe performance register reset are also supported.

l Configuration management

The T2000 enables the user to configure and manage interfaces, clocks, services, trails,protections, and time.

l Security management

The T2000 realizes NM user management, NE user management, NE login management, NElogin lockout, NE setting lockout, and local craft terminal (LCT) access control.

4 SoftwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 93: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l Maintenance management

The T2000 provides the loopback, board reset, automatic laser shutdown (ALS), and opticalpower detection, and data collection functions, to help maintenance personnel introubleshooting.

4.5 ASON SoftwareAccording to ITU-T Recommendations, an automatically switched optical network (ASON)includes three planes: control plane, management plane, and transport plane.

The management plane refers to an upper layer management system such as the T2000. Thetransport plane refers to a traditional SDH network. The control plane is where the ASONsoftware is applied, and uses the LMP, OSPF-TE, and RSVP-TE protocols.

Figure 4-2 shows the ASON software architecture. The ASON software mainly includes thelink management module (which uses the link management protocol — LMP), the signalingmodule, the routing module, and the cross-connection management module.

Figure 4-2 ASON software architecture

Cross-connectionmanagement

module

NEsoftware

Signaling module

Routing module

T2000

AOSN software

LMP link managementmodule

Link Management Module

Using the LMP protocol, the link management module provides the following functions:

l Create and maintain control channels.

l Verify member links and TE links.

Signaling Module

Using the RSVP-TE protocol, the signaling module provides the following functions:

l Set up or tear down service connections according to user requests.

l Synchronize and restore services on the basis of service status changes.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 4 Software

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5

Page 94: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Routing ModuleUsing the OSPF-TE protocol, the routing module provides the following functions:

l Collect and flood the TE link information.

l Collect and flood the control link information of the control plane.

l Compute service trails and control the routing.

Cross-Connection Management ModuleThe cross-connection management module provides the following functions:

l Create and delete cross-connections.

l Report link status, alarms, and other relevant information.

4 SoftwareOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

4-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 95: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

5 Data Features

About This Chapter

The data features include Ethernet features, RPR features, ATM features, SAN features andDDN features.

5.1 Ethernet FeaturesThis section describes the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions,application and protection.

5.2 RPR FeaturesThis section describes the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, applicationand protection.

5.3 ATM FeaturesThis section describes the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions,application and protection.

5.4 SAN FeaturesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.

5.5 DDN FeaturesThis section describes the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions andapplication.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-1

Page 96: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

5.1 Ethernet FeaturesThis section describes the Ethernet features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions,application and protection.

5.1.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the Ethernet boards N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0,N4EFS0, N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A to meet different Ethernetservice requirements.

5.1.2 ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmissionplatform.

5.1.3 ProtectionThe protection schemes for Ethernet services include LCAS and LAG.

5.1.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the Ethernet boards N1EFS4, N2EFS4, N1EFS0, N2EFS0,N4EFS0, N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A to meet different Ethernetservice requirements.

Table 5-1, Table 5-2, Table 5-3 and Table 5-4 list the Ethernet functions of these boards.

Table 5-1 Function list of EFS4 and EFS0

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Interface 4 FE 4 FE 8 FE 8 FE 8 FE

Interface type 10Base-T,100Base-TX

10Base-T,100Base-TX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

10Base-T,100Base-TX,100Base-FX

Interface board None None N1ETF8,N1EFF8

N1ETS8 (cooperating withTSB8 to realize 1:1 TPS),N1ETF8, N1EFF8

Service frameformat

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

4 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4 8 VC-4 8 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

12 24 12 24 24

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 97: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function N1EFS4 N2EFS4 N1EFS0 N2EFS0 N4EFS0

Ethernet privateline (EPL)

Supported

Ethernet virtualprivate line (EVPL)

Supported

Ethernet privateLAN (EPLAN)

Supported

Ethernet virtualprivate LAN(EVPLAN)

Supported

Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Supported

VLAN IEEE 802.1q/p

RSTP Supported

Multicast listening(IGMP snooping)

Supported

Encapsulation Generic framing procedure (GFP)

Link state passthrough (LPT)

Supported

Link capacityadjustment scheme(LCAS)

ITU-T G.7042

Committed accessrate (CAR)

Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

Intra-board portaggregation

Notsupported

Supported Notsupported

Supported Supported

Flow control IEEE 802.3X

Test frame Supported

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported

RMON Supported

Table 5-2 Function list of EGS2

Function N1EGS2 N2EGS2

Interface 2 GE

Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-3

Page 98: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function N1EGS2 N2EGS2

Interface board None

Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1 q/p

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 8 VC-4 16 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤12)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

24 48

EPL Supported

EVPL Not supported Supported

EPLAN Supported

EVPLAN Not supported Supported

Static MPLS label Not supported MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Not supported Supported

VLAN IEEE 802.1q/p

RSTP Not supported Supported

Multicast listening(IGMP snooping)

Not supported Supported

Encapsulation GFP

LPT Supported

LCAS Not supported ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

Flow control IEEE 802.3X

Intra-board portaggregation

Not supported Supported

Test frame Supported

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported

RMON Supported

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 99: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 5-3 Function list of N1EGT2, N1EFT8, and N1EFT8A

Function N1EGT2 N1EFT8 N1EFT8A

Interface 2 GE 16 FE 8 FE

Interface type 1000Base-SX,1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX

10Base-T, 100Base-TX, 100Base-FX

10Base-T,100Base-TX

Interface board None Supports 8 x FE if notused with an interfaceboard.Supports 16 x FEif used with interfaceboards N1ETF8 andN1EFF8.

None

Service frame format Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600bytes

Supported by the latterfour ports, 9600 bytes

Supported by thelatter four ports,9600 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4 8 VC-4 4 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4,VC-3-xv (x≤24),VC-4-xv (x≤8)

VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv(x≤3)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

2 16 8

Ethernet service types Only EPL supported; EVPL, EPLAN and EVPLAN not supported

MPLS Not supported

VLAN Transparent transmission

Encapsulation GFP, LAPS, HDLC

LPT Not supported

LCAS ITU-T G.7042

CAR Not supported

Flow control IEEE 802.3X

Test frame Supported

Ethernet performancemonitoring

Supported

Table 5-4 Function list of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4

Interface 4 GE and 16 FE 4 GE

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-5

Page 100: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4

Interface type 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX, 10Base-T, 100Base-TX,100Base-FX

1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX, 1000Base-ZX

Interface board Supports 4 x GE if not used with aninterface board. Supports 4 x GE and 16x FE if used with interface boardsN1ETF8 and N1EFF8.

None

Protection Supports 1+1 intra-board protection and port level protection.

Service frameformat

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1q/p

JUMBO frame Supported, 9216 bytes

Uplink bandwidth 16 VC-4

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-xv (x≤63), VC-3-xv (x≤24), VC-4-xv(x≤8)

Number ofVCTRUNKs

64

EPL Supported

EVPL Supports VLAN-based and QinQ-based EVPL services.

EPLAN Supported

EVPLAN Not supported

Static MPLS label Not supported

VLAN Supports VLAN and QinQ. Supports the adding, deletion and exchangeof VLAN labels, in compliance with IEEE 802.1q/p.

RSTP Supported

Multicast listening(IGMP snooping)

Supported

Encapsulation GFP, LAPS, HDLC

LPT Supported

LCAS ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

QoS trafficclassification

Supports port flow and port+VLAN flow.

CoS Supported

Shaping Supported

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 101: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function N1EMS4 N1EGS4

Flow control Supports IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control, based on GE/FE port.

Ethernetperformancemonitoring

Supported

Ethernet OAM Supported

Test frame Supported

Service mirroring Supported

Link aggregation Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

5.1.2 ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 3500 has the Ethernet access function integrated on the SDH transmissionplatform.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following types of Ethernet services:

l EPL Servicel EVPL Servicel EPLAN Servicel EVPLAN Service

EPL ServiceThere are two types of EPL services.

l EPL service based on port

The EPL implements the point-to-point transparent transmission of Ethernet services. As shownin Figure 5-1, the Ethernet services of different NEs are transmitted to the destination nodethrough their respective VCTRUNKs. The Ethernet services are also protected by the SDH self-healing ring (SHR). In this way, the secure and reliable transmission is guaranteed.

Figure 5-1 EPL service based on port

SHR

1

3

4

5

Traffic flown

NE 4

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

2

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-7

Page 102: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l EPL service based on port+VLAN

EPL services can be isolated by VLAN tags when these services share a VCTRUNK bandwidth.

As shown in Figure 5-2, traffic classification is performed for the Ethernet service according tothe port and VLAN ID, to distinguish different VLANs of Companies A and B. A maximum oftwo priorities can be set according to the traffic classification result.

For security purpose, the OptiX OSN 3500 isolates services of different users by VLANs. InFigure 5-2, VLAN 1 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 11 of Company B, VLAN2 of Company A shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 12 of Company B, and VLAN 3 of CompanyA shares a VCTRUNK with VLAN 13 of Company B. All services of Company A are convergedto NE1 and then sent through an FE/GE interface of NE1 to the Lanswitch for further processing.

Figure 5-2 EPL service based on port+VLAN

VLAN 1

VLAN 2

VLAN 13

VLAN 1

VLAN 2VLAN 3

Headquarters ofCompany B

Branch

Branch

Branch

VLAN 12

VLAN 3

VLAN 11 VLAN 12

VLAN 13

Headquartersof Company A

VLAN 11

1 3

2

Traffic flown

SHR

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

EVPL Service

The OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the Martini MPLS L2 VPN encapsulation format to support EVPLservices.

An EVPL service offers point-to-point connection and implements service convergence forusers. As shown in Figure 5-3, the system searches the port+VLAN ID table for the externallabel (Tunnel) and the internal label (VC), and encapsulates them into the accessed data frames.In the network, data forwarding is based on the external label. In the last-hop provider edge (PE)equipment, the external and internal labels are stripped, and data forwarding at the egress portis based on these labels.

The OptiX OSN 3500 contains the functions of both provider (P) and provider edge (PE)equipment.

NOTE

PE equipment is used to interconnect user equipment and to access user services.

P equipment is used for the routing function and the forwarding of MPLS encapsulated services.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 103: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-3 EVPL service

L2 MPLS networkcomposed by OptiX

OSN Product

Company A

PE1 PE2P PPortA

TunnelLable VC Label DataCompany

60 10 ...A70 20

...B

... ... ......

TunnelPortB

PortA

PortB

60 1070 20 Data

Data 60 1070 20 Data

Data

Tunnel Tunnel VC labeladding/strippingTunnel VC label

adding/stripping

Company A

Company B

EPLAN ServiceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data. This is referred to as theEPLAN service, which can be transferred according to its destination media access control(MAC) address.

As shown in Figure 5-4, respective LANs of Companies A and B are connected to four NEs.The Ethernet services among the four NEs are not of a fixed point-to-point type. For example,if a user of Company A connected to NE3 needs to communicate with users of Company Aconnected to the other three NEs, the service flow directions are not fixed. The Ethernet Layer2 switching function provided by the OptiX OSN 3500 can be employed to solve this problem.For example, after relevant settings on NE3, the system sets up a MAC address table that canbe periodically updated by self-learning. Then, the data of Companies A and B accessed at NE3can be transmitted to their destinations over either the same VCTRUNK or differentVCTRUNKs, according to their respective MAC address tables.

In this way, the system configuration is simplified, and the bandwidth utilization is improved.In addition, the maintenance and management of equipment becomes easy for the operator.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-9

Page 104: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-4 EPLAN service

Company A Company B

NE1

Company A

Company B

Company A Company B

Company A

Company B

NE2

NE3

NE41

23

n Traffic flowMAC Address VC-TrunkMAC 1 NE1 ①

MAC 2 NE4 ②

MAC 3 NE2 ③… … …

EVPLAN ServiceThe OptiX OSN 3500 adopts the MPLS encapsulation format to support EVPLAN services.

The EVPLAN service implements the multipoint-to-multipoint connection of user sites. Fromthe viewpoint of user, the EVPLAN network is a big VLAN where the user services can beconverged.

As shown in Figure 5-5, when the user’s data frame (the source address is MAC H, and thedestination address is MAC A, B or C) enters the PE equipment, the system searches the Layer2 MAC address table, and obtains the external label (Tunnel label) and the internal label (VClabel). As a result, different label switch paths (LSPs) are set up depending on the addresses.When the data frame goes out of the PE equipment, the Tunnel and VC labels are stripped. Aftera search in the Layer 2 MAC address table, the Ethernet frame is forwarded to the relevant egressport according to its destination address.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 105: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-5 EVPLAN service

Branch CP

Branch A

Headquarters

Branch B

PE

PE

PE

Address =MAC C

Address =MAC A

Address =MAC B

Address =MAC HSink VC LabelTunnel Label

MAC A 101MAC B 202MAC C 303

Source

MAC H

MAC H

MAC H

LSP

LSP1LSP2LSP3

MPLSCore

LSP1 LSP2

LSP3

P PE

Transferd tocorrespondingport via the Layer2 route table

5.1.3 ProtectionThe protection schemes for Ethernet services include LCAS and LAG.

The Ethernet services of the OptiX OSN equipment are protected by various protection schemes,including:

l LCAS

l STP/RSTP

l Tributary protection switching (TPS)

l Board protection switching (BPS)

l Port protection switching (PPS)

l Link aggregation group (LAG)

l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP

l LPT

LCAS

The LCAS provides an error tolerance mechanism to enhance the reliability of the virtualconcatenation function. The LCAS has the following functions:

l When the LCAS is applied in the virtual concatenation technology, the LCAS enables theconfiguration of system capacity, the increase and decrease of the concatenated VCquantity, and the dynamic change of bearer bandwidth (services are not damaged duringthe dynamic change).

l The LCAS protects and restores failed members.

As shown in Figure 5-6, the LCAS can dynamically add or delete members to increase ordecrease the bandwidth. Services are not interrupted during such bandwidth adjustment.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-11

Page 106: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-6 Dynamic bandwidth adjustment through LCAS

I want another 10 Mbandwidth. Member

Member Headquarters

Branch

BranchNew member

MSTP network

MSTP

Headquarters

Member

Member

As shown in Figure 5-7, the LCAS realizes the protection of the Ethernet service. When somemembers fail, the faulty members are automatically deleted, while other members keeptransmitting data normally. When the faulty members are available again, they are automaticallyrestored, and the data is loaded to these members again.

Figure 5-7 Virtual concatenation group protection through LCAS

Member

Member Headquarters

BranchFailed member

Member

Member Headquarters

BranchDelete failed member

MSTP network

MSTP

STP/RSTPThe Ethernet boards support the spanning tree protocol (STP) and the rapid spanning treeprotocol (RSTP). When the STP or the RSTP is started, it logically modifies the networktopology to avoid a broadcast storm. The STP or the RSTP realizes link protection byrestructuring the topology.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 107: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

TPS

The TPS provides equipment level protection for tributary services. When a protected boardbecomes faulty, its services are switched to the protection board. In this way, a reliable operationof the equipment is ensured.

The OSN 3500 supports two groups of 1:1 TPS protection for the N2EFS0 or N4EFS0 board.

BPS

The BPS is a board-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board.When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure,the cross-connect board switches all services from the active board to the standby board to realizethe service protection.

The N1EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the BPS.

PPS

The PPS is a port-based protection scheme that requires an active board and a standby board.When the active board detects a link down failure of any port, or detects a board hardware failure,the cross-connect board switches the services of one or more affected ports to the standby boards.In this case, a protection switching for the entire board is not necessary.

Compared with the BPS, the PPS has less impact on external systems and the network.

The N1EGS4 and N1EMS4 boards both support the PPS.

LAG

A link aggregation group (LAG) bundles multiple links that are connected to the sameequipment, to increase the bandwidth and improve the link reliability. An LAG can be regardedas one link.

The LAG provides the following functions:

l Improve the link availability. In an LAG, members dynamically back up each other. Whenone link is interrupted, other members quickly take over.

l Add the link bandwidth. The LAG is an economic way for the user to increase the linktransmission rate. When multiple physical links are bundled, the user is able to obtain adata link of higher bandwidth, without upgrade the existing equipment. The capacity of anLAG equals the sum of the capacity of all member links.

l Balance load. Multiple physical links in an LAG share the traffic load and back up eachother.

l Improve the reliability. Members in an LAG dynamically back up each other.

l Support link aggregation. The N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support link aggregation, andcurrently support manual aggregation and static aggregation.

MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected by the MSP, SNCP, SNCMPand SNCTP schemes.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-13

Page 108: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

LPT

The link state pass through (LPT) is a link-based protection scheme. In a network, when theactive and standby ports between routers belong to different links, the LPT function is availablefor protection. When the working link becomes faulty, the LPT function shuts down the localport so that the opposite router knows that the working link is abnormal. As a result, servicesare switched from the active port to the standby port and are thus protected.

5.2 RPR FeaturesThis section describes the RPR features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions, applicationand protection.

The RPR defined by IEEE 802.17 employs a dual-ring topology in which the two rings are inreverse directions, as shown in Figure 5-8. Both the outer ring and the inner ring transmit datapackets and control packets. Hence, the bandwidth utilization is increased. The control packetson the inner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and thecontrol packets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the innerring. The two rings protect each other.

Figure 5-8 RPR ring

Node 1

Outer ring control

Node 2

Node 3

Node 42.5 Gbit/s RPR

Outer ring data

Inner ring data

Inner ring control

5.2.1 FunctionsThe RPR functions cover the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatialreuse and fairness algorithm.

5.2.2 ApplicationThe RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.

5.2.3 ProtectionThe RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.

5.2.1 FunctionsThe RPR functions cover the basic functions, service class, topology auto-discovery, spatialreuse and fairness algorithm.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 109: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Basic FunctionsThe EMR0 and EGR2 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the RPR features defined by IEEE802.17. Table 5-5 lists the basic functions of RPR boards.

Table 5-5 Function list of RPR boards

Function Boards

N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Interface 1 GE and 12 FE 1 GE and 12 FE 2 GE

Service frameformat

Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1QTAG

JUMBO frame Supported, 9600 bytes

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

16 VC-4 (2.5 Gbit/s)

Mappinggranularity

VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-xv (X≤8)

EVPL Supported

EVPLAN Supported

Static MPLS label MartinioE label supported

Stack VLAN Supported

VLAN Supports 4096 VLAN tags, as well as the adding, deletion, and exchangeof VLAN tags; compliant with IEEE 802.1q/p.

Spanning tree Supports RSTP

Multicastlistening (IGMPSnooping)

Supported

RPR protection Supports the steering, wrapping, wrapping+steering protection schemes,with the protection switching time being less than 50 ms.

Encapsulation GFP-F, compliant with ITU-T G.7041.LAPS, compliant with ITU-T X.86.

LCAS Supported, compliant with ITU-T G.7042

CAR Supported (The granularity is 64 kbit/s)

Flow control Supported, compliant with IEEE 802.3X

QoS trafficclassification

The N1EMR0 board supports traffic classification based on port, port+VLAN ID, or port+VLAN PRI.The N2EM40 and N2EGR2 boards support traffic classification basedon port, port+VLAN ID, port+VLAN ID+VLAN PRI, or MPLS_label.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-15

Page 110: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function Boards

N1EMR0 N2EMR0 N2EGR2

Intra-board portaggregation

Not supported Supported Supported

Weighted fairnessalgorithm

Supported

Topology auto-discovery

Supported

Maximumnumber of nodes

255

Service class Five classes: A0, A1, B_CIR, B_EIR and C

Service Class

The user data has three classes, which are A, B and C. On an RPR ring, Class A is further dividedinto the A0 and A1 subclasses. Class B is also divided into the B_CIR (committed informationrate) and B_EIR (excess information rate) subclasses.

Table 5-6 lists the differences among these classes.

Table 5-6 RPR service class

Class Subclass

Bandwidth Jitter FairnessAlgorithm

Application

A A0 Pre-allocated,irreclaimable

Low Irrelevant Real-timeservices

A1 Pre-allocated,reclaimable

Low Irrelevant Real-timeservices

B B_CIR Pre-allocated,reclaimable

Medium

Irrelevant Near real-time services

B_EIR Preemptible, not pre-allocated

High Relevant Near real-time services

C C Preemptible, not pre-allocated

High Relevant Best efforttransmission

Topology Auto-Discovery

The topology auto-discovery protocol provides an accurate and reliable method to quicklydiscover the topologies and their changes, for all nodes in a ring network. Hence, the topologyauto-discovery realizes the plug and play feature for the RPR.

To increase or decrease the total bandwidth of an RPR, you can use the LCAS function, whichrealizes the dynamic increase and decrease of bandwidth without affecting existing services.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 111: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Spatial ReuseOn an RPR, the stripping of unicast frames at the destination node realizes the spatial reuse forring bandwidth. As shown in Figure 5-9, the bandwidth of a single ring is 1.25 Gbit/s. Traffic1 sent from Node 1 to Node 4 is stripped from the ring at the destination Node 4, and thus thebandwidth behind Node 4 is left unused. In this case, Node 4 is able to send traffic to Node 3 ata 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. In this way, the bandwidth utilization is improved.

Figure 5-9 Spatial reuse

Node 1

Bandwidth of single ring is1.25Gbit/s

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Traffic 11.25 Gbit/s

Traffic 21.25 Gbit/s

Fairness AlgorithmThe outer ring and the inner ring of an RPR support independent weighted fairness algorithm.The fairness algorithm ensures the fair access of lower-class B_EIR and C services. The weightin the fairness algorithm is configurable so that different nodes can have different access rates.Weights need to be set for a node on the outer ring and the inner ring separately. In the case ofpreemptible bandwidth, these two weights decide at what bandwidth the node transmits lower-class services on the inner ring and the outer ring.

As shown in Figure 5-10, the weights of Nodes 2, 3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1. On the outerring, assume the bandwidth that is available for lower-class services to preempt is 1.2 Gbit/s. Inthis case, the fairness algorithm allocates 400 Mbit/s each for the lower-class services transmittedfrom Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.

Figure 5-11 shows a fairness algorithm with different weights, that is, the weights of Nodes 2,3 and 4 on the outer ring are 1, 3 and 2 respectively. In this case, the fairness algorithm allocates200 Mbit/s, 600 Mbit/s, and 400 Mbit/s bandwidths respectively for the lower-class servicestransmitted from Nodes 2, 3 and 4 to Node 1.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-17

Page 112: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-10 Fairness algorithm when the weight is 1

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Node 31

3

2

23

Traffic Bandwidth400 Mbit/s400 Mbit/s400 Mbit/s

1

Node3Node4

Node WeightNode2 1

11

Figure 5-11 Fairness algorithm when the weights are different

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Node 31

3

2

23

Traffic Bandwidth400 Mbit/s600 Mbit/s200 Mbit/s

1

Node3Node4

Node WeightNode2 1

32

5.2.2 ApplicationThe RPR boards support the application of RPR features in EVPL and EVPLAN services.

EVPL Service

The EVPL service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, and encapsulatesand forwards the traffic in the MPLS MartinioE format.

Figure 5-12 illustrates the accessing, forwarding and stripping of a unidirectional EVPL service.Node 2 adds the Tunnel and VC labels into the packet, and sends the packet onto the RPR. Node3 forwards the packet to the destination Node 4, which then strips the packet.

Figure 5-13 illustrates the EVPL service convergence, in which traffic classification is basedon port+VLAN so that multiple services can be converged at the GE port of Node 1.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 113: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-12 EVPL service accessing, forwarding and stripping

Node 1

Node 3

FE/GE

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

ActionTunnel

VCDestination

Insertion100100

Node 4

LSP ActionTunnel

VC

Stripping100100

Action Forwarding

Node 4Node 2FE/GE

Figure 5-13 EVPL service convergence

Node 1

Node 3

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

FE

FE

GE

Node 2 Node 4

Traffic Tunnel DestinationPort1+VLAN 2

VC200 Node 2200

Port1+VLAN 3 300 Node 3300Port1+VLAN 4 400 Node 4400

FEVLAN 2

VLAN 3

VLAN 4

VLAN 4

VLAN 3VLAN 2

EVPLAN ServiceThe EVPLAN service supports traffic classification based on port or port+VLAN, andencapsulates and forwards the traffic in the stack VLAN format. The EVPLAN service is realizedby creating virtual bridges (VBs) in the board. The VB supports the self-learning of source MACaddresses and the configuration of static MAC routes.

Figure 5-14 shows an example of the EVPLAN service. Port rpr1 is where the packets areaccessed onto the RPR. By address self-learning, the VB of each node determines the forwardingport and the destination node of the packets. At Node 1, if the destination MAC address of thepackets is A1, the packets are forwarded through Port 1. If the destination address is A2, thepackets are forwarded through Port 2. If the destination address is B1, B2 or C1, the packets areforwarded onto the RPR through Port rpr1, added with a stack VLAN tag whose value is 100.Node 2 forwards packets in the same way.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-19

Page 114: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-14 RPR EVPLAN service

A2

Node 1

Node 3

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 2 Node 4

MAC stack VLANPortA1 noneA2 noneport 2B1 100rpr1

Port 1

B2 100rpr1C1 100rpr1

Port 2

Port 1

Port 2

Port 1

A1

B1

B2

C1

port 1

MAC forwarding table of node 1

MAC stack VLANPortA1 100A2 100rpr1B1 noneport 1B2 noneport 2C1 100rpr1

rpr1

MAC forwarding table of node 2

A2

5.2.3 ProtectionThe RPR services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected by various protection schemes.

The protection schemes of the RPR services include:

l Wrapping, steering and wrapping+steering

l LCAS

l RSTP

l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP

WrappingWhen a failure is detected on the ring, the wrapping function performs an automatic loopbackat the nodes that are adjacent to the failure point, thus to connect the inner ring and the outerring. The protection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantages of this protection schemeare a fast protection speed and a small loss of data, and the disadvantage is the waste ofbandwidth.

Figure 5-15 illustrates the wrapping protection. The traffic is sent from Node 4, passes throughNodes 3 and 2 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2and 3, Nodes 2 and 3 perform an automatic loopback to connect the inner ring and the outer ring,so that the protection is realized.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 115: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-15 Wrapping protection

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Node 3

XFiber cut Traffic flow

Steering

In the steering protection, switching is not performed at the failure point. Instead, the sourcenode sends the traffic to the destination node through a new route that is generated by thetopology auto-discovery protocol. If the number of nodes on the ring is less than 16, the steeringprotection switching time is less than 50 ms. The advantage of this protection scheme is that itdoes not waste bandwidth. The disadvantage is that, when the network scale is large, theprotection switching speed is low, and some data is discarded before a new route is generated.

Figure 5-16 illustrates the steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, the traffic issent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all throughthe outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, the topology auto-discoveryprotocol discovers a new topology. On the basis of this new topology, the traffic is sent fromNode 4, passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all through the innerring.

Figure 5-16 Steering protection

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Node 3

XFiber cut

Traffic flowafter switching

Traffic flow beforeswitching

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-21

Page 116: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Wrapping+SteeringIn the wrapping+steering protection, when a failure is detected on the ring, the ring first performsa wrapping switching to ensure the switching speed and lessen the packet loss. After the topologyauto-discovery protocol generates a new ring topology, the ring performs the steering protectionso that the traffic is sent to the destination through the best route and the waste of bandwidth islessened.

Figure 5-17 illustrates the wrapping+steering protection. Before a failure occurs on the ring, thetraffic is sent from Node 4, passes through Nodes 3 and 2 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, allthrough the outer ring. When there is a fiber cut between Nodes 2 and 3, a wrapping switchingis first performed, so Nodes 2 and 3 are automatically loopbacked. After the topology auto-discovery protocol discovers a new topology, a steering switching is performed. As a result, thetraffic passes through Nodes 5 and 6 in turn, and at last reaches Node 1, all through the innerring.

Figure 5-17 Wrapping+steering protection

XNode 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Node 3

Fiber cut

Traffic flowafter switching

Node 1

Node 2

Node 5

Node 6

Dual-ring2.5 Gbit/s RPR

Node 4

Node 3

XFiber cut Traffic flow

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 117: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

LCAS

The LCAS function adds and reduces the bandwidth dynamically, and protects the bandwidth.

For details about the LCAS, refer to section 5.1.3 Protection.

RSTP

The RPR boards support the rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The RSTP realizes linkprotection by restructuring the topology. When the RSTP is started, it logically modifies thenetwork topology to avoid a broadcast storm.

MSP, SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP

At the optical transmission layer, Ethernet services can be protected when the MSP, SNCP,SNCMP, or SNCTP scheme is used.

5.3 ATM FeaturesThis section describes the ATM features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions,application and protection.

5.3.1 FunctionsOThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1,IDL4, and IDQ1.

5.3.2 ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.

5.3.3 ProtectionThe ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.

5.3.1 FunctionsOThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides four types of ATM processing boards, which are ADL4, ADQ1,IDL4, and IDQ1.

An ADL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an N1ADQ1 board canaccess and process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the N1PL3/N1PL3A/N1PD3board, the ADL4 or ADQ1 board can access and process E3 ATM services.

Table 5-7 lists the functions of the ADL4 and ADQ1 boards.

Table 5-7 Functions of ADL4 and ADQ1

Function Boards

ADL4 ADQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

Optical interfacespecification

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 andVe-1.2

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-23

Page 118: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function Boards

ADL4 ADQ1

Connector type LC

Optical module type SFP

E3 ATM interface Accesses 12 x E3 services by using the N1PD3, N1PL3, or N1PL3Aboard.

IMA Not supported

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

8 VC-4, or 12 VC-3 + 4 VC-4

ATM switchingcapability

1.2 Gbit/s

Mapping mode VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (x≤4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR

Number of ATMconnections

2048

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0

Supported ATMmulticastconnections

Spatial multicast and logical multicast

ATM protection(ITU-T I.630)

Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (Continuity Check)

An IDL4 board can access and process one STM-4 ATM service and an IDQ1 board can accessand process four STM-1 ATM services. When working with the E1 processing board, the IDL4or IDQ1 board can access and process IMA services.

Table 5-8 lists the functions of the IDL4 and IDQ1 boards.

Table 5-8 Functions of IDL4 and IDQ1

Function Boards

N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

Front panel interface 1 x STM-4 4 x STM-1

Optical interfacespecification

S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 andVe-1.2

Connector type LC

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 119: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Function Boards

N1IDL4 N1IDQ1

Optical module type SFP

E3 ATM interface Not supported

IMA (compliant withATM Forum IMA1.1 standards)

Accesses and processes IMA services when working with the E1processing board N1PQ1, N1PQM, or N2PQ1.Supports a maximum of 63 IMA E1 services.Supports the mapping of a maximum of 16 IMA groups to the ATMport.Each IMA group supports 1–32 E1 services.Supports the mapping ofa maximum of 16 E1 links (which are not in any IMA group) to theATM port.Supports a maximum of 226 ms of IMA multipath delay.

Maximum uplinkbandwidth

8 VC-4, or 63 VC-12 + 7 VC-4

ATM switchingcapability

1 Gbit/s

Mapping mode VC-12, VC-4, or VC-4-xv (X≤4)

Service type CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR and UBR

Number of ATMconnections

2048

Traffic type and QoS IETF RFC2514, ATM forum TM 4.0

Supported ATMmulticastconnections

Spatial multicast and logical multicast

ATM protection(ITU-T I.630)

Unidirectional or bidirectional 1+1, 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring

OAM function (ITU-T I.610)

AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC (continuity check)

Board level 1+1protection

Supported, with switching time less than 1s

5.3.2 ApplicationThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the application of several types of ATM services.

Supported Services and Traffic Types

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, and UBR services, but does not supportABR services.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-25

Page 120: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l The CBR services apply to voice services, as well as video services and circuit emulationservices of a constant bit rate. These services require guaranteed transmission bandwidthand latency.

l The rt-VBR services apply to audio and video services of a variable bit rate.

l The nrt-VBR services are mainly used for data transmission.

l The UBR services are generally used for LAN emulation and file transfer.

In terms of the supported services and traffic types, the OptiX OSN 3500 meets IETF RFC2514,ATM Forum TM 4.0, and ATM Forum UNI 3.1 Recommendations. See Table 5-9.

Table 5-9 ATM service types and traffic types

No. Traffic Type ServiceType

Parameter

1 atmNoTrafficDescriptor UBR None

2 atmNoClpNoScr UBR.1 Clp01Pcr

CBR Clp01Pcr

3 atmClpNoTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr

4 atmClpTaggingNoScr CBR Clp01Pcr, Clp0Pcr

5 atmNoClpScr nrt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs

6 atmClpNoTaggingScr nrt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs

7 atmClpTaggingScr nrt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs

8 atmClpTransparentNoScr CBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

9 atmClpTransparentScr rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

10 atmNoClpTaggingNoScr UBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

11 atmNoClpNoScrCdvt UBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

CBR Clp01Pcr, Cdvt

12 atmNoClpScrCdvt rt-VBR.1 Clp01Pcr, Clp01Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

13 atmClpNoTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.2 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

14 atmClpTaggingScrCdvt rt-VBR.3 Clp01Pcr, Clp0Scr, Mbs, Cdvt

Application of Bandwidth Exclusive ATM ServicesWhen the bandwidth is not shared, ATM services are processed by the ATM service processingboard, at the ATM layer of only the source and sink NEs. On intermediate NEs, only SDHtimeslot pass-through is performed, without ATM layer processing. In this case, each ATMservice exclusively occupies a VC-3 or VC-4 path. At the central node, the ATM services areconverged to an STM-1 or STM-4 optical port for output.

As shown in Figure 5-18, the 34 Mbit/s ATM services of NE1 and NE3 exclusively occupy aVC-3 bandwidth each. The 155 Mbit/s ATM service of NE2 exclusively occupies a VC-4

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 121: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

bandwidth. Only the SDH timeslot pass-through is performed at NE3. After the three servicesreach the central station NE4, they are converged by the ATM board and are output through the622 Mbit/s optical interface on the front panel.

Figure 5-18 Application of bandwidth exclusive ATM services

2.5 Gbit/s SDHRing

NE 2 NE 4

NE 1

NE 3

34M ATMTraffic

34M ATMTraffic

155M ATMTraffic

622M ATMTraffic

ServiceConvergence

DSLAM

DSLAM

RouterDSLAM

Application of Bandwidth Shared ATM ServicesThe VR-Ring and VC-Ring realize the bandwidth sharing and the statistical multiplexing forATM services. The ATM services on each NE share the same VC (VC-3, VC-4, or VC-4-xv)path and are processed at the ATM layer of all NEs.

As shown in Figure 5-19, NE1 accesses E3 ATM traffic from the tributary board and sends itto the ATM board for ATM switching and protection configuration (1+1 or 1:1). Then after thetraffic is encapsulated into VC-4-xv, it is sent onto the line by the cross-connect board. NE2accesses STM-1 ATM traffic from the optical interface, and then performs the ATM switchingand protection configuration. At the same time, the ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped at NE2for ATM layer processing. Then the locally accessed traffic and the traffic from the upstreamare encapsulated into the same VC-4-xv and sent to the downstream NE. The processing at NE3and NE4 is similar. One VP-Ring/VC-Ring has a maximum bandwidth of 300 Mbit/s.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-27

Page 122: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-19 VP-Ring/VC-Ring

VC4-Xv VP/VC-Ring

NE 2

NE 4

NE 1

NE 3

34M ATMTraffic

34M ATMTraffic

155M ATM Traffic

622M ATMTraffic

DSLAM

DSLAM

Router

DSLAM

The ATM traffic from NE1 is dropped tothe NE2, and then sent to VP/VC-Ring

after converged with local service.

Application of IMA ServicesThe inverse multiplexing for ATM (IMA) technology is used to demultiplex an ATM integratedcell flow into several lower rate links. At the far end, the lower rate links are multiplexed torecover the original integrated cell flow.

The IMA technology is applicable when ATM cells are transmitted through an interface of theE1 rate or other rates. The IMA technology only provides a path, and does not process servicetypes and ATM cells. The signals at the ATM layer and a higher layer are transparentlytransmitted.

Figure 5-20 illustrates the IMA service networking.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 123: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 5-20 IMA service networking

STM-16 two-fiberbidirectional

MSP ring

T2000

NE1

NE2

NE3

NE4

25km

35km 30km

40km

RNC

NodeB 1

NodeB 3

NodeB 2

NodeB 4

5.3.3 ProtectionThe ATM services of the OptiX OSN 3500 are protected at several layers.

The following protections are available.

l ATM layer protections

l Optical transmission layer protections, such as MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP

l 1+1 board level protection for IMA boards

ATM Layer Protections

Compliant with ITU-T I.630, protections at the ATM layer are classified in different ways, aslisted in Table 5-10. You can select a combination of the following types as required, forexample, 1+1 bidirectional non-revertive protection.

Table 5-10 Classification of ATM protection

Classification Scheme Protection Type

Bridging function 1+1 protection 1:1 protection

Switching direction Unidirectional protection Bidirectional protection

Connection level VPC protection VCC protection

Protection domain Trail protection SNCP, SNCMP, SNCTP

Revertive mode Revertive protection Non-revertive protection

Protected object Single connection protection Group connection protection

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-29

Page 124: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Optical Transmission Layer ProtectionsThe ATM service is also protected by the self-healing network at the optical transmission layer,where the protection schemes include MSP, SNCP, SNCMP, and SNCTP. You can set the hold-off time for the ATM protection switching. In this way, when network impairment occurs, theMSP, SNCP , SNCMP or SNCTP at the optical transmission layer performs the switching first,thus achieving the protection of the working ATM service (in this case, the protection switchingat the ATM layer is not performed).

1+1 Board Level Protection for IMA BoardsThe IDQ1 and IDL4 boards support the 1+1 board level protection. For the configuration of 1+1 board level protection, the IDQ1 and IDL4 boards must be inserted in paired slots.

5.4 SAN FeaturesThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides a multiservice transparent transmission processing board,N1MST4, to access and transparently transmit FC, FICON, ESCON and DVB-ASI services.

The N1MST4 board is described in detail as follows:

l The N1MST4 board provides four independent multiservice access ports. All portconnectors are of the LC (SFP) type.

l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x FC (FC100/FICON and FC200)services, with the total bandwidth being not more than 2.5 Gbit/s. The board also supportsthe full-rate transmission of FC services, which means that one FC200 service or two FC100services are supported.

l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the SDH side. FC100supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports 1500 km.

l The first and second ports support the distance extension function at the client side. FC100supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20 km.

l Using all the four ports, the N1MST4 board supports 4 x ESCON or 4 x DVB-ASI services.

l All services are encapsulated in the GFP-T format, which is compliant with ITU-T G.7041.All services are mapped into VC-4 or VC-4-xc (x=4, 8, or 16).

Table 5-11 lists the service types and bit rates provided by the N1MST4 board.

Table 5-11 Service types and bit rates provided by N1MST4

Service Type Bit Rate Remarks

FC100/FICON 1062.5 Mbit/s SAN service

FC200 2125 Mbit/s SAN service

ESCON 200 Mbit/s SAN service

DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s Video service

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-30 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 125: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

5.5 DDN FeaturesThis section describes the DDN features of the OptiX OSN 3500 in terms of functions andapplication.

5.5.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interfaceboard to access and process DDN services.

5.5.2 ApplicationWhen the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500,the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.

5.5.1 FunctionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 uses the N1DX1/N1DXA processing boards and the N1DM12 interfaceboard to access and process DDN services.

l The N1DX1 board processes 8 x 64 kbit/s services and eight framed E1 services and realizesthe service convergence. The N1DX1 also cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the systemside.

l The N1DXA board cross-connects N x 64 kbit/s signals at the system side.

l Working with the N1DX1 board, the N1DM12 board accesses framed E1 and N x 64 kbit/s services.

Table 5-12 lists the functions and features of the DDN boards.

Table 5-12 Functions and features of N1DX1 (N1DM12) and N1DXA

Board Feature N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA

Processingcapability

Processes 8 x 64 kbit/s and eightframed E1 services, and cross-connects 48 x 64 kbit/s signals at thesystem side.

Cross-connects 63 x 64 kbit/ssignals at the system side.

Bandwidth atSDH side

48 x E1. 63 x E1.

Interfacespecifications

N x 64 bit/s interface: RS232, RS449,EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24 andX.21.Framed E1 interface: CRC4 andnon-CRC4.

None.

Interfaceimpedance

75 ohms or 120 ohms. None.

Connector type The connectors are on the DM12board. The DB28 connector is usedfor N x 64 bit/s signals, and the DB44connector is used for framed E1signals.

None.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 5 Data Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 5-31

Page 126: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board Feature N1DX1 (N1DM12) N1DXA

Protection Supports 1:N TPS protection with theswitching time being less than 50 ms.

Not supported.

Loopback Supports inloop and outloop for allports.

Supports inloop and outloop forall ports.

PRBS self-test Supported. Not supported.

Alarm andperformance

A large number of alarms andperformance events are provided tofacilitate the equipment managementand maintenance.

A large number of alarms andperformance events are providedto facilitate the equipmentmanagement and maintenance.

5.5.2 ApplicationWhen the DDN service access and convergence board is configured in the OptiX OSN 3500,the SDH network is able to access and groom DDN services.

The N1DX1 and the N1DXA boards are mainly used on the following occasions, so variousservices such as RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21 and framed E1 can beaccessed to a transmission network.

l Point-to-point transmission for video conferences and routers

l Point-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers

l Multipoint-to-multipoint transmission for video conferences and routers

l Access and convergence of multipoint routers

The N1DX1 and N1DXA boards are applicable to DDN private networks for small-sized andmedium-sized enterprises, government agencies, and banking and security service halls.

5 Data FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

5-32 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 127: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

6 DCN Features

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports several DCN schemes.

6.1 OverviewThe SDH element management system (EMS) sets up communication with SDH NEs througha data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these SDH NEs.

6.2 HWECCThe HWECC protocol is a private protocol defined by Huawei.

6.3 IP Over DCCThe equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.

6.4 OSI Over DCCThe equipment supports the OSI Over DCC protocol.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-1

Page 128: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

6.1 OverviewThe SDH element management system (EMS) sets up communication with SDH NEs througha data communication network (DCN), to manage and maintain these SDH NEs.

In a DCN, the EMS and NEs are both regarded as network nodes, which can be connected throughEthernet or physical data communication channels (DCCs).

In practical networking, the EMS and NEs can be located on different floors in a building, indifferent buildings, or even in different cities. Therefore, the connection between the EMS andNEs usually requires an external DCN that is composed of equipment such as Lanswitch androuters. On the other hand, the DCN among NEs is referred to as an internal DCN. This sectiondescribes the internal DCN composed of SDH NEs. See Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 DCN networking

IP/OSIDCN

ExternalDCN

HuaWeiT2000

HWECC orIP/OSI over

DCC

Interior DCN

6.1.1 Background of SDH DCNWith the development of network scale, the OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult.A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost.

6.1.2 SDH DCN SolutionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports three communication protocols for the DCN networking.

6.1.1 Background of SDH DCNWith the development of network scale, the OAM of a network becomes more and more difficult.A stable and robust DCN management network helps lower the OAM cost.

In a DCN, the D bytes in SDH overheads are used as physical channels for DCN management.The customer does not need to set up private DCN channels so that the network constructioncost is greatly lowered. For a DCN, the SDH provides the following bandwidth.

6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

6-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 129: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l By using the D1–D3 bytes in SDH regenerator section overheads (RSOH), the SDHprovides a 192 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.

l By using the D4–D12 bytes in SDH multiplex section overheads (MSOH), the SDHprovides a 576 kbit/s bandwidth for the DCN.

l By using the D1–D12 bytes in SDH section overheads, the SDH provides a 768 kbit/sbandwidth for the DCN.

Figure 6-2 shows the positions of D bytes in SDH overheads.

Figure 6-2 Positions of D bytes in SDH overheads

A1 A1 A1 A2 A2 A2 J0

B1 E1 F1

D1 D2 D3

AU PTR

B2 B2 B2 K1 K2

D4 D5 D6

D7 D8 D9

D10 D11 D12

S1 M1 E2

* *

RSOH

MSOH

6.1.2 SDH DCN SolutionsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports three communication protocols for the DCN networking.

The three communication protocols are as follows.

l HWECC

l TCP/IP (IP over DCC)

l OSI (OSI over DCC)

The HWECC protocol is a private protocol developed by Huawei to support the DCN networkingof OptiX equipment. The HWECC protocol features easy configuration and application. As itis private, the HWECC protocol does not meet the management requirements for hybridnetworking with equipment from other vendors.

The TCP/IP and OSI protocols are standard communication protocols that solve the managementissue in the case of hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors. These two protocolscan also be used in a network that is composed of only Huawei equipment.

NOTE

When OptiX equipment is interconnected with other vendors' equipment that does not support the TCP/IPand OSI standard communication protocols, Huawei provides the transparent transmission function forDCC bytes, and provides relevant Ethernet service channels to transparently transmit the OAM information.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-3

Page 130: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 6-1 lists the DCC resource allocation modes supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 6-1 DCC allocation modes of the OptiX OSN 3500

DCC Allocation N1GSCC N3GSCC

Channel type Supports both the D1–D3 andD4–D12 channel types.

Supports both the D1–D3 andD4–D12 channel types.

Operationmode

Mode 1 Supports 40 D1–D3 channels. Supports 160 D1–D3 channels.

Mode 2 Supports 10 D1–D3 channels.Supports 10 D4–D12channels.

Supports 40 D1–D3 channels.Supports 40 D4–D12 channels.

Mode 3 Supports 22 D1–D3 channels.Supports 6 D4–D12 channels.

-

Default protocol type D1-D3 D4-D12 D1-D3 D4-D12

HWECC IP HWECC IP

Default mode Mode 1

6.2 HWECCThe HWECC protocol is a private protocol defined by Huawei.

6.2.1 FeaturesThe HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.

6.2.2 ApplicationThe HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.

6.2.1 FeaturesThe HWECC protocol is used to transmit OAM information among Huawei OptiX equipment.

In hybrid networking with equipment from other vendors, the HWECC protocol is not able toidentify the OAM information from other vendors’ equipment, but can transparently transmitsuch OAM information. Using the existing DCC resources, the user is able to fulfill a centralizedmanagement of equipment.

The HWECC protocol has the following features.

l The protocol provides a flexible networking environment.

l NEs can be connected through optical interfaces or Ethernet interfaces for embeddedcontrol channel (ECC) communication.

l The protocol provides transparent transmission for the OAM information from othervendors’ equipment.

NOTE

In the OptiX OSN 3500, each slot supports a maximum of eight ECC channels.

6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

6-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 131: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

6.2.2 ApplicationThe HWECC protocol has three typical applications depending on the networking.

OAM Information Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment Only

When OAM information is transmitted only among OptiX OSN equipment, a gateway NE isrequired for the communication with the T2000. Connected to the gateway NE through the Qxinterface, the T2000 tests, manages and maintains the entire network.

The T2000 system helps improve the network service quality, lower the maintenance cost, andensure a reasonable use of network resources. A non-gateway NE is connected to the gatewayNE through ECC, to realize the transmission of the OAM information.

In some special cases, extended ECC communication through Ethernet interfaces is alsoavailable among NEs. See Figure 6-3.

Figure 6-3 Networking with extended ECC

Network cable

Fiber

HUB1PC HUB2NE6GNE1

NE2

NE3 NE4

NE5

NE6 NE7

NE8

NE9 NE10

NE12

NE11

Subnet1 Subnet2

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN Equipment

When there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information ofthe third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4–D12 bytes of the OptiXOSN equipment. See Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (ECC)

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

D1-D3 D1-D3Transparenttransmission

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-5

Page 132: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information ofthe OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted through D4-D12 bytes of theequipment. See Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (ECC)

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

D1-D3 D1-D3

Transparenttransmission

6.3 IP Over DCCThe equipment supports the IP over DCC protocol.

6.3.1 FeaturesUsing the IP over DCC protocol, the OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network managementinformation.

6.3.2 ApplicationThe IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

6.3.1 FeaturesUsing the IP over DCC protocol, the OptiX OSN equipment can transmit network managementinformation.

The IP over DCC protocol has the following features.

l The TCP/IP protocol realizes the compatibility with the equipment from other vendors. Inthis case, the network management is simplified.

l The Layer 3 functions of protocol stacks are adopted. In this case, additional overheads orserver trails are not required for the transmission of the OAM information of other vendors’equipment.

l The protocol provides flexible networking modes.

l Several application layer protocols are supported.

6.3.2 ApplicationThe IP over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

6-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 133: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party EquipmentWhen there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information ofthe OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by usingthe IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-6.

Figure 6-6 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (IP)

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

IP over DCC

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN EquipmentWhen there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information ofthe third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, byusing the IP over DCC protocol. See Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (IP)

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

IP over DCC

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

6.4 OSI Over DCCThe equipment supports the OSI Over DCC protocol.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-7

Page 134: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

6.4.1 FeaturesThe OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between OptiX OSN equipment and otheroptical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.

6.4.2 ApplicationThe OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

6.4.1 FeaturesThe OSI over DCC protocol is for hybrid networking between OptiX OSN equipment and otheroptical network equipment that supports OSI over DCC.

The OSI over DCC protocol has the following features:

l In a transmission network composed of equipment from different vendors, the OSI overDCC protocol enables transparent transmission of OAM information at the network layer,and thus provides a more flexible networking.

l The user does not need to set up additional DCN channels. The existing DCC resourcesrealize the centralized management of equipment from different vendors.

6.4.2 ApplicationThe OSI over DCC protocol has two typical applications depending on the networking.

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by Third-Party Equipment

When there is third-party equipment between OptiX OSN equipment, the OAM information ofthe OptiX OSN equipment can be transparently transmitted by third-party equipment, by usingthe OSI over DCC protocol.

As shown in Figure 6-8, Huawei equipment is at the network edges, and equipment from othervendors is in the backbone network. The OAM information between the T2000 and the OptiXOSN equipment needs to be forwarded by equipment from other vendors. In this case, eachsubnet composed of Huawei equipment must have at least one gateway NE.

Figure 6-8 OAM information transparently transmitted by third-party equipment (OSI)

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

OSI over DCC

OSIprotocolstack

OSIprotocolstack

OSIprotocol

stack

6 DCN FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

6-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 135: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

OAM Information Transparently Transmitted by OptiX OSN EquipmentWhen there is OptiX OSN equipment between third-party equipment, the OAM information ofthe third-party equipment can be transparently transmitted by the OptiX OSN equipment, byusing the OSI over DCC protocol.

As shown in Figure 6-9, the Huawei equipment is in the backbone network, and equipment fromother vendors is at the network edges. The OAM information between the network managementsystem and the equipment of other vendors needs to be forwarded by the Huawei equipment.

NOTE

In actual application, a network cannot always be divided in such a clear manner. A more common hybridnetworking is that equipment from different vendors coexists at both the core layer and the peripheral layer.

Figure 6-9 OAM information transparently transmitted by OptiX OSN equipment (OSI)

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

OSI over DCC

Third partyequipment

Third partyequipment

OSI protocol stack

OSI protocolstack

OSIprotocol

stack

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 6 DCN Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 6-9

Page 136: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 137: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

7 ASON Features

About This Chapter

The OptiX GMPLS control plan (GCP) is the ASON software developed by Huawei. The OptiXGCP applies to the OptiX OSN series products. With this software, the traditional network canevolve into the ASON network. The OptiX OSN series products support the ASON features.

7.1 Automatic Discovery of the TopologiesThe automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control linksand TE links.

7.2 End-to-End Service ConfigurationThe ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.

7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and RestorationThe ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and networksecurity.

7.4 SLAThe ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.

7.5 Diamond ServicesDiamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in thenetwork, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicableto voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.

7.6 Gold ServicesGold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamondservices, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.

7.7 Silver ServicesThe service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver levelservice is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.

7.8 Copper ServicesThe copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt servicesin holidays, are configured as copper services.

7.9 Iron Services

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-1

Page 138: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as ironservices. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can beconfigured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.

7.10 TunnelsTunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASONserver trails.

7.11 Service AssociationThe service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different pointsinto the ASON network.

7.12 Service OptimizationAfter the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thusrequires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching theoptimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize theservice without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during theservice optimization.

7.13 Service MigrationOptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services andtraditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interruptthe services.

7.14 Reverting Services to Original RoutesAfter many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.You can revert all service to the original routes.

7.15 Preset Restoring TrailCustomers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. Tothis end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This functionhelps increase the controllability of service routing.

7.16 Equilibrium of Network TrafficThe ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.

7.17 Shared Risk Link GroupIn the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.

7.18 ASON Trail GroupThe ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

7.19 Protocol EncryptionYou can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 139: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

7.1 Automatic Discovery of the TopologiesThe automatic discovery of the topologies includes the automatic discovery of the control linksand TE links.

7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control LinksThe ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.

7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE LinksThe ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.

7.1.1 Auto-Discovery of Control LinksThe ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.

When the fiber connection is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses the OSPFprotocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own control linksto the entire network. See Figure 7-1. As a result, each NE obtains the information of the controllinks in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-wide controltopology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes the shortestroute to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which is usedfor the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.

Figure 7-1 Auto-discovery of control links

ASON domain

When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discoverthe network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the managementsystem for real-time display. See Figure 7-2.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-3

Page 140: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 7-2 Management of control topology

R1

R2

R3

R4

: ASON NE

: User equipment

7.1.2 Auto-Discovery of TE LinksThe ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.

After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TElink verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire networkthrough OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wideresource topology.

ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion andaddition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to T2000,which performs a real-time refresh.

As shown in Figure 7-3, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayedon the NM in real time.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 141: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 7-3 TE link auto-discovery

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

7.2 End-to-End Service ConfigurationThe ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.

The ASON supports both SDH permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. Toconfigure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidthrequirement, and protection level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodesare all automatically completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node,explicit link and excluded link to constrain the service routing.

Compared with the service configuration of SDH networks, it fully utilizes the routing andsignaling functions of the ASON NEs and thus it is convenient to configure services.

For example, consider the configuration of a 155 Mbit/s ASON service between A and I inFigure 7-4. The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connectionat nodes A, D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculatesthe best route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.

The service is created as follows:

l Choose the bandwidth granularity.

l Choose the server level.

l Choose the source node.

l Choose the sink node.

l Create the service.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-5

Page 142: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 7-4 End-to-end service configuration

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

7.3 Mesh Networking Protection and RestorationThe ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and networksecurity.

As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Comparedwith the traditional SDH networking mode, the mesh networking does not need to reserve 50%bandwidth. Thus, it can save bandwidth resources to satisfy increasingly large bandwidthdemand. In addition, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery route for eachservices so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network security.

As shown in Figure 7-5, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculatesanother route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 143: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 7-5 Trail restoration

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

7.4 SLAThe ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.

The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,as listed in Table 7-1.

Table 7-1 Service level

Service Protection andRestoration Scheme

ImplementationMeans

Switching andRerouting Time

Diamondservice

Protection and restoration SNCP and rerouting Switching time < 50msRerouting time < 2 s

Goldservice

Protection and restoration MSP and rerouting Switching time < 50msRerouting time < 2 s

Silverservice

Restoration Rerouting Rerouting time < 2 s

Copperservice

No protectionNo restoration

- -

Ironservice

Preemptable MSP -

Table 7-2 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-7

Page 144: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 7-2 TE links used by ASON services

Service Level WorkingResource of TELink

ProtectionResource of TELink

Non-ProtectionResource of TELink

Diamond service

Servicecreation

Not used Not used Used

Servicererouting

Not used Used when theresource is notenough

Used with the priority

Serviceoptimization

Not used Not used Used

Goldservice

Servicecreation

Used with thepriority

Not used Used when theresource is notenough

Servicererouting

Used with thepriority

Used when theresource is notenough

Used when theresource is notenough

Serviceoptimization

Used with thepriority

Not used Used when theresource is notenough

Silverservice

Servicecreation

Not used Not used Used

Servicererouting

Not used Used when theresource is notenough

Used with the priority

Serviceoptimization

Not used Not used Used

Copperservice

Servicecreation

Not used Not used Used

Serviceoptimization

Not used Not used Used

Ironservice

Servicecreation

Not used Used with thepriority

Used when theresource is notenough

7.5 Diamond ServicesDiamond services have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources in thenetwork, diamond services provide a permanent 1+1 protection. Diamond services are applicableto voice and data services, VIP private line, such as banking, security and aviation.

A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It isalso called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 145: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is theworking LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the workingLSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is normal, the sink node receivesthe service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.

Figure 7-6 shows a diamond service.

Figure 7-6 Diamond Services

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

Protection LSP

Working LSP

There are three types of diamond services.

l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.

l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.

l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.

Table 7-3 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.

Table 7-4 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.

Table 7-5 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.

Table 7-3 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

Requirements forcreation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between thesource node and the sink node

Protection andrestoration

l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always availablefor a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSPand the other is the standby LSP.

l If the resources are not sufficient, one LSP can still be reservedfor a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the servicesurvivability.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-9

Page 146: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service

Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout

l Supports rerouting priority

l Supports three rerouting policies:– No rerouting constraint

– Use existing trails whenever possible

– Do not use existing trails whenever possible

l Supports setting the revertive mode

l Supports setting the trigger condition

l Supports setting the WTR time

l Supports setting the crankback times

Revertive l Revertive services support reverting to the original routeautomatically

l Non-revertive services support reverting to the original routemanually

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections anddiamond services

l Supports migration between diamond services and silverservices

l Supports migration between diamond services and copperservices

Service switching Supports manual switching

Service optimization Supports service optimization

Service association Does not support service association

ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails

Alarms to triggerrerouting

R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,AU_AIS

Table 7-4 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

Requirements forcreation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between thesource node and the sink node

Protection andrestoration

l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched.Rerouting is not triggered.

l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standbyLSP for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.

l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting istriggered to create a new LSP to restore services.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 147: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service

Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout

l Supports rerouting priority

l Supports three rerouting policies:– No rerouting constraint

– Use existing trails whenever possible

– Do not use existing trails whenever possible

Revertive l Revertive services support reverting to the original routeautomatically

l Non-revertive services support reverting to the original routemanually

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections anddiamond services

l Supports migration between diamond services and silverservices

l Supports migration between diamond services and copperservices

Service switching Supports manual switching

Service optimization Supports service optimization

Service association Does not support service association

ASON server trail Does not support diamond ASON server trails

Alarms to triggerrerouting

R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS

Table 7-5 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Requirementsfor creation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source nodeand the sink node

Protection andrestoration

l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSPfor transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.

l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is nottriggered.

l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is nottriggered.

Servicemigration

l Supports migration between permanent SNCP connections anddiamond services

l Supports migration between diamond services and silver services

l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-11

Page 148: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Serviceswitching

Supports manual switching

Serviceoptimization

Supports service optimization

Serviceassociation

Does not support service association

ASON servertrail

Does not support diamond ASON server trails

7.6 Gold ServicesGold services are applicable to voice and significant data services. Compared with diamondservices, gold services have greater bandwidth utilization.

A gold service needs only one LSP. This LSP must use working resource of TE links or non-protection resource of TE links. When a fiber on the path of a gold service is cut, the ASONtriggers MSP switching to protect the service at first. If the multiplex section protection fails,the ASON triggers rerouting to restore the service.

As shown in Figure 7-7, a gold service can be configured from A to I.

Figure 7-7 Gold services

R1

R2

R3

R4

: ASON NE

: User equipment

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

MSP

MSP

MSP

Table 7-6 lists the attributes of gold services.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 149: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 7-6 Attributes of gold services

Attribute Gold Service

Requirements forcreation

Sufficient working resources or non-protection resources areavailable between the source node and the sink node.

Multiplex sectionprotection

l Supports using the working resources of a 1:1 linear multiplexsection protection chain to create gold services.

l Supports using the working resources of a two-fiber bidirectionalmultiplex section protection ring to create gold services.

l Supports using the working resources of a four-fiber bidirectionalmultiplex section protection ring to create gold services.

Protection andrestoration

When a fiber is cut for the first time, MS switching is performed toprotect services. When MS switching fails, rerouting is thentriggered to restore services.

Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout

l Supports three rerouting policies:– Use existing trails whenever possible.

– Do not use existing trails whenever possible.

– No rerouting constraint

l Supports setting the revertive mode

l Supports setting the priority

l Supports setting the WTR time

l Supports setting the crankback times

Revertive l Revertive services support reverting to the original routeautomatically.

l Non-revertive services support reverting to the original routemanually.

Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail

Service migration Supports migration between permanent connections and goldservices.

Service switching Supports manual switching

Service optimization Supports service optimization

ASON server trail Supports gold ASON server trails

Alarms to triggerrerouting

R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, AU_AIS

7.7 Silver ServicesThe service restoring time ranges from hundred milliseconds to a few seconds. The silver levelservice is suitable for those data or internet services that have low real-time requirement.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-13

Page 150: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Silver services are also called rerouting services. Upon an LSP failure, periodical rerouting isperformed until the rerouting succeeds. If there are not enough resources, service may beinterrupted.

As shown in Figure 7-8, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is cut,the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber. Hence,services are protected.

Figure 7-8 A silver service

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

Table 7-7 lists the attributes of silver services.

Table 7-7 Attributes of silver services

Attribute Silver Services

Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between thesource node and the sink node.

Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create anew LSP to restore services.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 151: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Attribute Silver Services

Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout

l Supports rerouting priority

l Supports three rerouting policies:– No rerouting constraint

– Use existing trails whenever possible

– Do not use existing trails whenever possible

l Supports setting the crankback times

l Supports setting the revertive mode

l Supports setting the WTR time

Revertive l Revertive services support reverting to the original routeautomatically.

l Non-revertive services support reverting to the original routemanually.

Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections andsilver services

l Supports migration between diamond services and silverservices

l Supports migration between silver services and copperservices

Service optimization l Supports service optimization.

l If a revertive silver service reroutes, it cannot be optimizedbefore reverting to its original route.

Service association Supports service association

ASON server trail Supports silver ASON server trails

Alarms to trigger rerouting R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI,AU_AIS

7.8 Copper ServicesThe copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt servicesin holidays, are configured as copper services.

Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not rerouteand are interrupted. Table 7-8 lists the attributes of copper services.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-15

Page 152: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 7-8 Attributes of copper services

Attribute Silver Service

Requirements forcreation

Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the sourcenode and the sink node.

Service restoration Does not support rerouting

Service migration l Supports migration between permanent connections and copperservices

l Supports migration between diamond services and copper services

l Supports migration between silver services and copper services

Serviceoptimization

Supports service optimization

Service association Supports service association

ASON server trail Supports ASON server trails

7.9 Iron ServicesThe iron services are also seldom used. Generally, temporary services are configured as ironservices. For example, when service volume soars, during holidays, the services can beconfigured as iron services to fully use the bandwidth resources.

An iron service is also called a preemptable service. Iron services apply non-protection links orMS protection links to create LSPs. During MS switching, iron services may be preempted andinterrupted. When the MS recovers, iron services are recovered. Interruption, preemption andrecovery of iron services are reported to the T2000. When an LSP fails, services are interruptedand rerouting is not triggered. Table 7-9 lists the attributes of iron service.

Table 7-9 Attributes of iron services

Attribute Iron Service

Requirementsfor creation

Sufficient protection resources or non-protection resources are availablebetween the source node and the sink node.

Multiplexsectionprotection

To create iron services, the following resources can be used:l Protection resources of 1:1 linear MSP

l Protection resources of two-fiber bidirectional MSP

l Protection resources of four-fiber bidirectional MSP

Servicerestoration

Does not support rerouting

Servicemigration

Supports migration between iron services and extra permanent connections

Serviceoptimization

Supports service optimization.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 153: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

7.10 TunnelsTunnels are mainly used to carry VC-12 or VC-3 services. Tunnels are also called as ASONserver trails.

When lower order services are to be created, first create a VC-4 tunnel. The protection level forthe tunnel can be gold, silver or copper. Then, use the management system to complete theconfiguration of the lower order service. See Figure 7-9.

Figure 7-9 Tunnel

R1

R2

R3

R4

VC4 tunnel VC12 service

: ASON NE

: User equipmentASON domain

The configuration of a tunnel is different from that of the above-mentioned service types. Itscross-connection from the tributary board to the line board can only be configured manually. Asshown in Figure 7-10, there is a tunnel between NE1 and NE2 which can be a gold ASON servertrail, silver ASON server trail or copper ASON server trail. During service creation, the ASONautomatically chooses the line boards of NE1 and NE2 and the timeslots of the line boards.

After creating tunnels, you must manually create and delete the lower order cross-connectionfrom the tributary board to the line board. During rerouting or optimization of the tunnels,however, the cross-connections at the source and sink nodes automatically switch to the newports.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-17

Page 154: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 7-10 Lower cross-connnection

VC12

NE1 NE2

VC12ASON server trail

VC4

VC12

Cross-connection

Line unitTributary unit

Table 7-10 lists the attributes of tunnels.

Table 7-10 Attributes of tunnels

Attribute Gold Tunnel Silver Tunnel Copper Tunnel

Requirementsfor creation

Same as gold services Same as silverservices

Same as copperservices

Servicerestoration

Same as gold services Same as silverservices

Does not supportrerouting

Rerouting l Supports reroutinglockout.

l Supports reroutingpriority.

l Supports reroutinglockout.

l Supports reroutingpriority.

Does not supportrerouting

Revertive Not supported Not supported Not supported

Pre-configurationof restoringroute

Not supported Supported Not supported

Serviceassociation

Not supported Supported Supported

Servicemigration

l Supports migration between tunnel services and permanent connections.

l Supports migration between silver tunnel services and copper services.

Serviceoptimization

Supports service optimization.

Tunnel level VC-4

7.11 Service AssociationThe service association can be used to associate the same service accessed from different pointsinto the ASON network.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 155: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. Duringthe rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of theassociated service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed fromtwo points.

As shown in Figure 7-11, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber betweenB and G is cut, the rerouting of the A-B-G-H LSP avoids the D-E-I LSP.

Figure 7-11 Service Association

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

1+1Protection

1+1Protection

Table 7-11 lists the attributes of service association.

Table 7-11 Attributes of service association

Attribute Service Association

Serviceoptimization

Supports optimization of associated services.

Rerouting When one service reroutes, it avoids the route of the associated service.

Service type l Supports the association of two silver services.

l Supports association of two copper services.

l Supports the association of a silver service and a copper service.

l Supports the association of two silver tunnels.

l Supports the association of two copper tunnels.

l Supports the association of a silver tunnel and a copper tunnel.

7.12 Service OptimizationAfter the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and thusrequires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating a new LSP, switching theoptimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and optimize the

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-19

Page 156: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

service without disrupting the service. Of course, the service route can be restricted during theservice optimization.

LSP optimization has the following features.

l Only manual optimization is supported.l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.l During optimization, rerouting, downgrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.l During creation, rerouting, downgrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,

optimization is not allowed.l The following service types support optimization: diamond, gold, silver, copper and

tunnel services.

7.13 Service MigrationOptiX GCP supports the conversion between ASON services, and between ASON services andtraditional services. The service conversion is in-service conversion, which would not interruptthe services.

Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent ConnectionsCurrently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:

l Migration between diamond services and permanent SNCP connectionsl Migration between gold services and permanent connectionsl Migration between silver services and permanent connectionsl Migration between copper services and permanent connectionsl Migration between iron services and permanent connectionsl Migration between tunnel services and server trail.

Service Migration between ASON TrailsCurrently, Huawei's OptiX GCP supports:

l Migration between diamond services and silver servicesl Migration between diamond services and copper servicesl Migration between silver services and copper services

7.14 Reverting Services to Original RoutesAfter many changes in an ASON network, service routes may differ from the original routes.You can revert all service to the original routes.

CAUTIONThe operation reverting network-wide services to original routes interrupts the services. Becautious to perform the operation.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 157: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Original RouteGenerally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON service. Ifthe original route recovers after rerouting of the ASON services, the services can be adjusted tothe original route manually or automatically. In addition, the current route can be set to theoriginal route after rerouting of the ASON services.

Revertive ServicesThe ASON services supporting the service reverting are as follows:l Diamond services

l Gold services

l Silver services

l Tunnel services

Description on Service RevertingFor the detailed description of reverting, refer to the Table 7-12.

Table 7-12 Reverting service to original routes

Attribution Non-Revertive Service Revertive Service

Prerequisites The original route has no failuresand has free timeslots.

The original route has no failures.

Reverting mode Manual The services are automaticallyreverted after 10 minutes. The wait-to-revert time can be set.

Batch reverting Supported -

Timeslots Reverting services to originalroutes. Does not revert services tooriginal timeslots.

Reverting services to original routes.Reverting services to originaltimeslots.

Modifyingoriginal route

Supported Supported

7.15 Preset Restoring TrailCustomers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. Tothis end, the OptiX GCP provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This functionhelps increase the controllability of service routing.

The OptiX GCP supports setting a preset restoring trail for an ASON trail. When the ASON trailreroutes, the service is restored to the preset restoring trail.

7.16 Equilibrium of Network TrafficThe ASON network distributes the service traffic to different routes as possible.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-21

Page 158: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The ASON calculates a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many servicesbetween two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibriumfunction is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-12, there are many silver servicesbetween R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them todifferent routes averagely as possible such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I.

Figure 7-12 Traffic equilibrium

: ASON NE

: User equipment

R1

R2

R3

R4

AB

C

D

E

F

GH

I

7.17 Shared Risk Link GroupIn the ASON network, the SRLG needs to be set when a group of optical fibers are in one cable.

The SRLG is the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risks,that is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be reroutedto another link that has the same risk.

Hence, the SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk in the network soas to avoid that the LSP after rerouting of the ASON services and the faulty link share the samerisk and to shorten the service restoration time during ASON service rerouting. You can changethe SRLG attribute.

7.18 ASON Trail GroupThe ASON supports amalgamation of ASON and LCAS.

LCASLCAS is Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme. With LCAS enabled, the bandwidth of VCTRUNKcan be adjusted dynamically without affecting services. As shown in Figure 7-13, VCTRUNK1is bound with four VC4s, with two transmitted over path 1 and two over path 2. If the VC4 inpath 1 fails, the two VC4s in path 2 will transmit all Ethernet service without affecting the serviceof VCTRUNK1. You can add VC4 on either path if necessary.

7 ASON FeaturesOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

7-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 159: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 7-13 LCAS (different path)

Router BRouter A NE1 NE2

VCTRUNK1

Path 1

Path 2

If these VC4s are transmitted over a path, adding/deleting VC4 will not affect the service. Asshown in Figure 7-14, VCTRUNK1 is bound with four VC4s. If the first VC4 fails, the Ethernetservice remains unaffected.

Figure 7-14 LCAS (same path)

Router BRouter ANE1 NE2

VCTRUNK1

ASON Trail Group

An ASON trail group associates all member trails for the same LCAS service within one LSPgroup. These member trails then can be added, deleted or modified. To provide virtual serviceswith the error tolerance ability, these member trails must be as separate as possible.

Each ASON trail group is identified by an ID. The ASON NE allocates an ID to each ASONtrail group. The member trails within an ASON trail share the same source and sink. The trailsmust also be as separated as possible.

7.19 Protocol EncryptionYou can encrypt the RSVP and OSPF in an ASON domain to improve the security of the network.

An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a nodeof this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the networkand repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function toencrypt protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are encrypted forauthentication.

The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication forinterconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).

The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication.

The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes arethe same.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 7 ASON Features

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 7-23

Page 160: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 161: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

8 Protection

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports equipment level protection and network level protection.

8.1 Equipment Level ProtectionThe equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1protection for power supplies.

8.2 Network Level ProtectionThe network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-1

Page 162: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

8.1 Equipment Level ProtectionThe equipment level protection includes TPS protection, 1+1 protection for boards and 1+1protection for power supplies.

8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary BoardsThis section describes the TPS protection supported by the equipment in the terms of servicetype and protection schemes. This section also lists the parameters for the TPS protection.

8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing UnitsWith the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in thesafe manner.

8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC UnitWith the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.

8.1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 BoardsThe N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection schemes.

8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM BoardsThe N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection.

8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface UnitThe equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.

8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion UnitThe WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.

8.1.8 Intelligent FansThe intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambienttemperature of the equipment.

8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power SupplyThe equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection,the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.

8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal ConditionsThe protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection andovervoltage protection, and so on.

8.1.1 TPS Protection for Tributary BoardsThis section describes the TPS protection supported by the equipment in the terms of servicetype and protection schemes. This section also lists the parameters for the TPS protection.

Table 8-1 lists the supported TPS protection schemes and boards. Table 8-2 lists TPS protectionparameters.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 163: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 8-1 TPS protection schemes and supported boards

Service Type Protection Scheme Supported Boards

E1/T1 Main subrack: one 1:N protection(N≤8)Extended subrack: one 1:Nprotection (N≤8)

N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1a

E3/T3/E4/STM-1 Main subrack: two 1:N (N≤3)protectionsExtended subrack: two 1:N (N≤3) protections

N1PD3, N1PL3, N2PQ3,N2PD3, N2PL3, N1SPQ4,N2SPQ4, N1SEP

Ethernet Two 1:1 protections N2EFS0, N4EFS0

DDN One 1:N protection (N≤8) N1DX1

a: The N2PQ1 board does not support T1 services.

Table 8-2 TPS protection parameters

Parameter Description

Priority 1–X: X is equal to the number of working boards. Priority 1 is thehighest priority.

Switching type Forced switching, manual switching, lockout of switching

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:l The clock of the working board is lost.

l The working board is offline.

l The working board is under a cold reset.

l The hardware of the working board fails.

l A switching command is issued.

Switching time ≤ 50 ms

Revertive mode Revertive

WTR time 300s to 720s. The WTR time of 600s is recommended.

8.1.2 1+1 Hot Backup for the Cross-Connect and Timing UnitsWith the 1+1 protection for the cross-connect and timing units, the equipment can run in thesafe manner.

For the OptiX OSN 3500, the cross-connect and timing units are integrated in the cross-connectand timing board. The cross-connect and timing board adopts a 1+1 hot backup mechanism sothat the cross-connect and timing units are both protected. Table 8-3 lists the 1+1 hot backupparameters of the cross-connect and timing units.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-3

Page 164: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 8-3 1+1 hot backup parameters of the cross-connect and timing units

Parameter Description

Slots for working andprotection boards

By default, slot 9 is for the working board and slot 10 is for theprotection board.

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:l The working board is offline.

l The working board is under a cold reset.

l The hardware of the working board fails.

l A switching command is issued.

Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protectionboard becomes the working board, and the original working boardbecomes the protection board.

8.1.3 1+1 Hot Backup for the SCC UnitWith the 1+1 protection for the SCC unit, the equipment can run in a secure manner.

For the OptiX OSN 3500, the GSCC board provides the system control and communication(SCC) functions. The active and standby GSCC boards form a 1+1 hot backup mechanism.

The 1+1 backup is used for the GSCC. When the active GSCC is working, the standby GSCCis in the protection state.

Table 8-4 lists the 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit.

Table 8-4 1+1 hot backup parameters of the SCC unit

Parameter Description

Slots for working andprotection boards

By default, slot 18 is for the working board and slot 17 is for theprotection board.

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:l The working board is offline.

l The working board is under a cold reset.

l The hardware of the working board fails.

l A switching command is issued.

Revertive mode Non-revertive. After successful switching, the original protectionboard becomes the working board, and the original working boardbecomes the protection board.

8.1.4 1+1 Protection for the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 BoardsThe N1EMS4 and N1EGS4 boards support the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection schemes.

Table 8-5 lists the 1+1 BPS and 1+1 PPS protection parameters of the N1EMS4 and N1EGS4boards.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 165: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 8-5 1+1 protection parameters of N1EMS4 and N1EGS4

Parameter Description

Slots for working andprotection boards

Configurable as required.

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:l The port status of the working board is Link Down.

l The clock of the working board is lost.

l The hardware of the working board fails.

l A switching command is issued.

Revertive mode Non-revertive

Switching time ≤ 350 ms

When a protection group needs to perform the BPS or PPS protection switching, the followingconditions must be met.

l The equipment interconnected with the protection group must have the same working modeas the protection group.

l The transmit end and the receive end should be connected directly through optical fibersor network cables. No intermediate equipment should be present between the two ends.

l The working mode should not be modified before the protection group is deleted.Otherwise, the protection group becomes abnormal.

CAUTIONThe equipment cannot detect the modification of the working mode at the receive end of theprotection group.

8.1.5 1+1 Protection for ATM BoardsThe N1IDL4 and N1IDQ1 boards of the OptiX OSN 3500 support board level 1+1 protection.

Table 8-6 lists the 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards.

Table 8-6 1+1 protection parameters of ATM boards

Parameter Description

Slots for working andprotection boards

Configurable as required.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-5

Page 166: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Parameter Description

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:l A manual switching command is issued.

l The power supply of the board fails.

l The clock of the board fails.

l The hardware of the board fails.

Revertive mode Non-revertive

Switching time ≤ 50 ms

8.1.6 1+1 Hot Backup for the Power Interface UnitThe equipment supports 1+1 backup for the PIU.

Using the two N1PIU boards, the OptiX OSN 3500 can access two –48 V DC power supplies.These two power supplies back up each other. When either of them fails, the other power supplytakes over to ensure normal operation of the equipment.

8.1.7 Protection for the Wavelength Conversion UnitThe WDM board that supports the 1+1 protection is the N1LWX.

In the OptiX OSN 3500, the arbitrary bit rate wavelength conversion unit N1LWX has two types:One is single fed and single receiving, and the other is dual fed and selective receiving.

A dual fed and selective receiving N1LWX board supports intra-board protection, and one boardof this type can realize optical channel protection. The single fed and single receiving LWXboards support inter-board protection, that is, 1+1 inter-board hot backup protection.

Table 8-7 lists the 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of the N1LWX board.

Table 8-7 1+1 inter-board protection parameters of N1LWX

Parameter Description

Slots for working andprotection boards

Configurable as required.

Switching condition Any of the following conditions triggers the switching:l The hardware of the working board fails.

l A switching command is issued.

Revertive mode Non-revertive

Switching time ≤ 50 ms

8.1.8 Intelligent FansThe intelligent fans can automatically adjust the rotating speed according to the ambienttemperature of the equipment.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 167: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The OptiX OSN 3500 uses three intelligent fan units to realize the heat dissipation. The powersupplies of the three fan modules back up each other.

The intelligent fans provide the functions of intelligent speed regulation and failure detection.When one of the fan modules becomes faulty, the other operates at its full speed. The runningstatus of the fan is indicated by the corresponding indicators on the front panel of the fan unit.

8.1.9 1:N Protection for the +3.3 V Board Power SupplyThe equipment supports 1:N protection for the +3.3 V board power supply. With this protection,the board can be supplied with power in a reliable manner.

Using the power backup unit on the N1AUX board, the OptiX OSN 3500 provides reliable powerbackup for the +3.3 V power supply of other boards. When the power supply of a board fails,the backup power supply immediately takes over to ensure the normal operation of the board.

8.1.10 Board Protection Schemes Under Abnormal ConditionsThe protection schemes under abnormal conditions include undervoltage protection andovervoltage protection, and so on.

Power-Down Protection During Software LoadingThe verification function is provided for both applications and data. After software loading isinterrupted, the basic input/output system (BIOS) does not boot any applications or data that arenot successfully or completely loaded. Instead, the BIOS waits for the loading to be resumed,until the software is successfully and completely loaded.

Overvoltage or Undervoltage Protection for Power SupplyThe power board provides a lightning protection component to effectively avoid the damagethat may be caused by transient high voltages such as lightning.

When the board has an undervoltage, the board automatically resets its CPU so that the softwarere-initializes the chip.

The software provides mirroring protection for key registers whose abnormality can affectservices. In this case, when the value of such a register is changed due to unstable voltages, thevalue can be restored to normal.

When the board has an undervoltage, the power system also automatically turns off the powersupply on the main loop so that the system is protected.

Board Temperature DetectionTemperature detection circuits are built in boards (for example, the cross-connect and timingboard) that generates a large amount of heat. When the board detects a high temperature, analarm is generated to remind the maintenance personnel of cleaning the fans.

8.2 Network Level ProtectionThe network level protection includes MSP protection, SNCP protection and DNI protection.

8.2.1 Linear MSP

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-7

Page 168: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.

8.2.2 MSP RingThe MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.

8.2.3 SNCPThe subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.

8.2.4 DNIThe DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.

8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail ProtectionWhen the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or evenSTM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels.These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. For the ringsat the channel layer, protection schemes can be set accordingly, such as the MSP, SNCP andnon-protection.

8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSPIn the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multipleMSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.

8.2.7 RPR ProtectionThe RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.

8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring ProtectionThe protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.

8.2.1 Linear MSPThe linear MSP rings supported by the equipment are 1+1 single-ended switching, 1+1 dual-ended switching and 1:N dual-ended switching MSP rings.

The linear MSP is mainly used in a chain network. The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 1+1 and 1:N(N≤14) protection schemes, and supports a maximum of 40 linear MSPs. In the 1:N protectionscheme, extra services are supported to be transmitted on the protection system. The switchingtime of linear MSP is less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.

For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System PlanningGuidelines.

Table 8-8 lists the linear MSP parameters.

Table 8-8 Linear MSP parameters

ProtectionType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

DefaultWTRTime

SwitchingCondition

1+1 single-endedswitching

Non-revertive

Notrequired

≤ 50 ms - Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOS

1+1 single-endedswitching

Revertive Notrequired

≤ 50 ms 600s

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 169: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

ProtectionType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingProtocol

SwitchingTime

DefaultWTRTime

SwitchingCondition

1+1 dual-endedswitching

l R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SD

(optional)l Forced

switchingl Manual

switchingl Exercise

switching

Non-revertive

APSprotocol

≤ 50 ms -

1+1 dual-endedswitching

Revertive APSprotocol

≤ 50 ms 600s

1:N dual-endedswitching

Revertive APSprotocol

≤ 50 ms 600s

8.2.2 MSP RingThe MSP rings supported by the equipment are four-fiber MSP ring and two-fiber MSP ring.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the hybrid application of two-fiber and four-fiber MSP rings,with the switching time less than 50 ms, as required in ITU-T G.841.

Table 8-9 lists the maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500.

For details, refer to the OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System PlanningGuidelines.

Table 8-9 Maximum number of MSP rings supported by the OptiX OSN 3500

Protection Scheme Maximum Number of MSP Rings Supported

STM-64 four-fiber MSP ring 2

STM-64 two-fiber MSP ring 2

STM-16 four-fiber MSP ring 11

STM-16 two-fiber MSP ring 12

Table 8-10 lists the MSP ring parameters.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-9

Page 170: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 8-10 MSP ring parameters

ProtectionType

RevertiveMode

SwitchingMode

Switching Time

DefaultWTRTime

SwitchingCondition

Two-fiberbidirectionalMSP

Revertive l Forcedswitching

l Manualswitching

l Exerciseswitching

≤ 50 ms 600s Any of thefollowingconditionstriggers theswitching:l R_LOSl R_LOFl MS_AISl B2_EXCl B2_SDl Forced

switchingl Manual

switchingl Exercise

switching

Two-fiberunidirectional MSP

Revertive l Forcedswitching

l Manualswitching

l Exerciseswitching

≤ 50 ms 600s

Four-fiberbidirectionalMSP

Revertive l Forcedswitching -ring

l Manualswitching -ring

l Exerciseswitching -ring

l Forcedswitching -span

l Manualswitching -span

l Exerciseswitching -span

≤ 50 ms 600s

The MSP supported by the OptiX OSN 3500 has the following features.

Adjustable MS BandwidthThe MS bandwidth refers to the number of VC-4s used by an MSP ring or chain.

In the case of the MSP, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the bandwidth adjustment by VC-4 withoutinterrupting services. For an STM-16 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth ranges fromone VC-4 to eight VC-4s. For an STM-64 bidirectional MSP ring, the MS bandwidth rangesfrom one VC-4 to 32 VC-4s.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 171: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Upgradeable MS BandwidthOptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service upgrade of the MS bandwidth without interruptingservices. For example, an STM-4 MSP ring can be upgraded to an STM-16 MSP ring withoutinterrupting services.

Two Sets of K Bytes at the Multiplex SectionFor STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces, the OptiX OSN 3500 is able to process two sets ofK bytes at the multiplex section. In this case, two MSP rings can be set up in one optical interface.

MS SquelchingThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the squelching of misconnected services at the VC-4 level.

In an MSP ring, each protection timeslot is shared by different spans or occupied by extra traffic.When there is no extra traffic in the ring, and a multipoint failure causes a node to be isolatedfrom the ring, traffics that occupy the same timeslot may try to preempt this timeslot. As a result,the misconnection of services occurs. When extra traffic is transmitted in the protection path,the traffic on the working path may preempt the protection timeslot that is being used by extratraffic, even if only one point fails in the ring. As a result, the misconnection also occurs.

To prevent service misconnection, each OptiX OSN 3500 node sets up a detailed list ofconnections. Each node knows the source and the sink of any AU-4. With the automaticprotection switching (APS) commands, each node can detect in advance the possibility ofmisconnection. By inserting the AU-AIS alarm, each node then discards these services that maybe misconnected.

8.2.3 SNCPThe subnet connection protection schemes are SNCP, SNCMP and SNCTP.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the subnetwork connection protection (SNCP), the subnetworkconnection multipath protection (SNCMP), and the subnetwork connection tunnel protection(SNCTP), for subnetworks that meet the ITU-T G.841 requirements.

SNCPThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the end-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and anSNCP-protected trail. See Figure 8-1.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-11

Page 172: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-1 End-to-end conversion between an unprotected trail and an SNCP-protected trail

NE1NE4

NE3

NE2NE5

NE8

NE7NE6

The unprotected trail

NE1NE4

NE3

NE2NE5

NE8

NE7NE6

The working trail

Convert to an SNCP-protected trailConvert to an unprotected trail

The protection trail

In the trail management window of the T2000, you can convert an exiting unprotected trail toan SNCP-protected trail. In the opposite way, you can also convert an SNCP-protected trail toan unprotected trail. In addition, the following trail-level operations are supported:

l Manual switching to protection path

l Manual switching to working path

l Forced switching to protection path

l Forced switching to working path

l Wait-to-restore (WTR) time setting

l Revertive mode setting

Table 8-11 lists the SNCP parameters.

Table 8-11 SNCP parameters

Protection Type RevertiveMode

Switching Time

DefaultWTR Time

SwitchingConditions

SNCP Revertive ≤ 50 ms 600s Any of the followingconditions triggers theswitching:l R_LOSl AU_LOPl TU_LOPl MS_AISl AU_AIS

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 173: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Protection Type RevertiveMode

Switching Time

DefaultWTR Time

SwitchingConditions

Non-revertive

≤ 50 ms - l TU_AISl HP_UNEQl HP_TIMl B2_EXCl B3_EXCl B3_SDl BIP_EXCl BIP_SD

SNCMPThe SNCMP is an N+1 (which means multiple protection paths protect a working path)protection scheme. The SNCMP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCP is a 1+1 protectionscheme.

The SNCMP provides multiple protection paths for a service. In this case, the service protectionis implemented by a mechanism of multiple fed at the source and selective receiving at the sink.The SNCMP is supplementary to the SNCP. While the SNCP protects services only in a line-to-line manner, the SNCMP protects services whose source and sink can both be in the linedirection or in the tributary direction.

Figure 8-2 illustrates the principle of multipath protection. The source broadcasts services tomultiple paths, and the sink determines which service to receive according to the service priorityand then the service quality. When services are correctly received on both the working andprotection paths, the sink selects the service from the working path.

Figure 8-2 Principle of multipath protection

Source Sink

Working

Protection 1

Protection 2

Protection 3

Intermediatesubnetworks

A B

In the SNCMP networking shown in Figure 8-3, two protection paths protect a working path,and Protection 2 is a protection path that uses microwave as the transmission media. Undernormal conditions, NE3 receives the service from the working path.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-13

Page 174: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-3 SNCMP networking

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

WorkingProtection 1

Protection 2

MicrowareRadio

MicrowareRadio

When the transmission between NE1 and NE2 becomes faulty, as shown in Figure 8-4, NE3receives the service from the higher priority protection path Protection 1.

Figure 8-4 SNCMP service route in the case of single point failure

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

WorkingProtection 1

Protection 2

MicrowareRadio

MicrowareRadio

When the transmissions between NE1 and NE2, and between NE1 and NE4, both become faulty,as shown in Figure 8-5, NE3 receives the service from the second protection path Protection 2.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 175: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-5 SNCMP service route in the case of multipoint failure

NE 1

NE 2

NE 3

NE 4

WorkingProtection 1

Protection 2

MicrowareRadio

MicrowareRadio

SNCTPThe SNCTP provides protection paths at the VC-4 level. When the working path is faulty, allits services can be switched to the protection path.

The SNCTP is different from the SNCP in that the SNCTP checks the status of only the entireVC-4 path, and such a check is irrelevant to the levels of services in the path. When the workingpath is faulty, relevant higher order alarms are raised, and then all services in the working pathare switched to the protection path. If the fault is relevant only to lower order services, lowerorder alarms are raised, and the switching does not occur.

8.2.4 DNIThe DNI is a protection scheme used for the dual-node interconnection topology.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the DNI protection, which is compliant with the ITU-T G.842.

The DNI network topology protection scheme effectively enhances the reliability of inter-ringservices. The DNI realizes the protection of services between two rings, which are networkedby equipment from different vendors and take different protection schemes. The DNI providesprotection in the case of fiber failure and node failure.

The DNI provides protection for services between the following rings:

l Two SNCP rings

l An SNCP ring and an MSP ring

l Two MSP rings

Figure 8-6 illustrates a DNI protection of two SNCP rings.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-15

Page 176: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-6 DNI protection of two SNCP rings

SNCPRing 1

SNCPRing 2

NE E

NE DNE C

NE F

NE G

NE A

Selecting PointForward Working RoutingReverse Working Routing

When any of the following faults occurs, the inter-ring services can be protected.

l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 1.

l A fiber cut occurs on SNCP Ring 2.

l A fiber cut occurs on the two SNCP rings.

l NE C (primary node) or NE D (secondary node) is faulty.

l NE E (primary node) or NE F (secondary node) is faulty.

l NE C and NE E are both faulty.

l NE D and NE F are both faulty.

The primary node and the secondary node protect each other. When one node is faulty, inter-ring services are not affected.

8.2.5 Fiber-Shared Virtual Trail ProtectionWhen the fiber-shared virtual trail protection is used, an STM-64, STM-16, STM-4 or evenSTM-1 optical channel is logically divided into several lower order or higher order channels.These channels are then connected to other links at the channel layer to form rings. For the ringsat the channel layer, protection schemes can be set accordingly, such as the MSP, SNCP andnon-protection.

Figure 8-7 shows the fiber-shared virtual trail protection.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 177: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-7 Fiber-shared virtual trail protection

STM-16SNCP

STM-16MSP

STM-64

STM

-64

8.2.6 Optical-Path-Shared MSPIn the optical-path-shared MSP scheme, an optical interface can be configured into multipleMSP groups, so multiple MSP rings can share the same fiber and optical interface.

A prerequisite for this function is that the optical interface board is able to process multiple setsof independent K bytes. N1SL64, N1SLD64, N2SL64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16 and N1SF16of the OptiX OSN 3500 support the configuration of shared optical paths. An STM-64 or STM-16optical interface supports a maximum of two sets of K bytes.

Figure 8-8 shows the networking of two-fiber optical-path-shared MSP supported by the OptiXOSN 3500.

Figure 8-8 Optical-path-shared MSP

Optical-path-shared MSP ring

STM-16/64

STM-4/16

Optical-path-shared MSP ring

STM-4/16

STM-4/16 STM-4/16

STM-4/16

STM-4/16

For example, two lower-rate west line units share one higher-rate east line unit, as shown inFigure 8-9.

Figure 8-9 One higher-rate line shared by two lower-rate lines

STM-16

MSP ring 1

MSP ring 2X

STM-16

STM-16

STM-64

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-17

Page 178: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The OptiX OSN 3500 also supports the line units of the same rate to form a shared protectionin two directions, as shown in Figure 8-10. In this case, the west STM-16 line units can onlyadd part of their VC-4s into the MSP ring protection group.

Figure 8-10 One line shared by two lines of the same rate

STM-16

MSP ring 1

MSP ring 2X

STM-16

STM-16

STM-16

8.2.7 RPR ProtectionThe RPR protection schemes are Wrapping and Steering.

Figure 8-11 shows a bidirectional RPR that is of a reverse dual-ring structure. The outer ringand the inner ring both transmit data packets and control packets. The control packets on theinner ring carry the control information of the data packets on the outer ring, and the controlpackets on the outer ring carry the control information of the data packets on the inner ring.

The RPR has the following advantage: On the RPR, every node assumes that the packets addedonto the ring will finally reach their destination, regardless of which path is used. A node canonly perform three types of operations to the packets, that is, insertion (adding a new packetonto the ring), forwarding (forwarding the packet), and stripping (dropping the packet locally).Compared with a mesh network, an Ethernet ring greatly decreases the communication trafficamong nodes. The reason is that a mesh network determines the forwarding port on the basis ofevery single packet.

Figure 8-11 Example of bidirectional RPR

Node 1

Outer ring

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5Inner ring

RPR

In the case of a fiber cut, the RPR provides the wrapping and steering functions for packets.

The wrapping function connects the inner ring and the outer ring at the two nodes that are adjacentto the fiber cut point. See Figure 8-12.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 179: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-12 RPR wrapping protection

Node 1

Outer ring

Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5Inner ring

RPR

Wapping

The steering function reversely transmits packets from the transmit node in the case of a fibercut. See Figure 8-13.

Figure 8-13 RPR steering protection

Outer ring

Inner ring

Node 1Node 2

Node 3

Node 4

Node 5

RPR

Steering

In both protection schemes, the packets can reach their destination though in a reverse direction,and the service failure time is less than 50 ms. During the protection switching, the wrappingfunction is usually performed first. After the new topology and the new service trail are created,the steering function is then performed. Such a mechanism ensures that packets are not lostduring the protection switching, and that the protection switching time is shortened.

8.2.8 VP-Ring/VC-Ring ProtectionThe protection scheme at the ATM layer is VP-Ring/VC-Ring.

Figure 8-14 shows the principle of VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection at the ATM layer. The VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection scheme reserves protection resources, and can be applied on anyphysical topology. The reserved protection resources include routes and bandwidths.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 8 Protection

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 8-19

Page 180: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 8-14 VP-Ring/VC-Ring protection

NE1

NE2

NE4

NE3

Working path

Protection path

ATM service ATM service

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides protection for virtual paths (VPs) and virtual channels (VCs),and protects ATM services through a dual fed and selective receiving mechanism. Twoconnections (VP/VC), which represent the working path and the protection path, are set up atboth the source node NE1 and the sink node NE3. Under normal conditions, the receive endselects the service from the working path. When the primary ring becomes faulty, the receiveend detects the failure and triggers the protection. In this way, the receive end selects the servicefrom the protection path, and thus the ATM service is protected.

8 ProtectionOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

8-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 181: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

9 Clock

About This Chapter

The equipment can trace several clock sources and provides the clock protection function.

9.1 Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the following clock sources.

9.2 Clock Working ModeThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781.

9.3 Clock OutputsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs.

9.4 Clock ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM andextended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.

9.5 Tributary RetimingThe retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals froma digital synchronization network, and then to transmit them together to the customer.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Clock

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-1

Page 182: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

9.1 Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the following clock sources.

l External clock source

l Line clock source

l Tributary clock source

l Internal clock source

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports priority setting for clock sources. By default, the internal clocksource is of the lowest priority.

9.1.1 External Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock source inputs.

9.1.2 Line Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source.

9.1.3 Tributary Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources.

9.1.4 Internal Clock SourceWhen all line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or whenonly internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internalclock source as the system clock.

9.1.1 External Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock source inputs.

l Two 75-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

l Two 120-ohm external clock inputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

9.1.2 Line Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 can trace the line clock source.

9.1.3 Tributary Clock SourceThe OptiX OSN 3500 can trace tributary clock sources.

The specific tracing relation is as follows.

l When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (correspondingto the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the ninth physical port)displayed on the T2000 for the PQ1, PQM.

l When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (correspondingto the first physical port) or the second port (corresponding to the fourth physical port)displayed on the T2000 for the PD3, PQ3.

l When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (correspondingto the first physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the PL3, DX1.

9 ClockOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

9-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 183: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l When tracing tributary clock sources, the NE can only trace the first port (correspondingto any physical port) displayed on the T2000 for the SPQ4.

9.1.4 Internal Clock SourceWhen all line, tributary and external clock sources in the priority list are not usable, or whenonly internal clock source is available in the priority list, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the internalclock source as the system clock.

9.2 Clock Working ModeThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the clock working mode that complies with ITU-T G.781.

l Locked mode

l Holdover mode

l Free-run mode

9.2.1 Locked ModeIn the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source,tributary clock source and the external clock source.

9.2.2 Hold-Over ModeIf all clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored beforethe loss as its clock source. The frequency information complies with the related phase standarddefined in ITU-T G.813.

9.2.3 Free-Run ModeThe OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whosefrequency stability is not worse than ±4.6 ppm.

9.2.1 Locked ModeIn the locked mode, the OptiX OSN 3500 traces one clock source from the line clock source,tributary clock source and the external clock source.

9.2.2 Hold-Over ModeIf all clock sources are lost, the OptiX OSN 3500 uses the frequency information stored beforethe loss as its clock source. The frequency information complies with the related phase standarddefined in ITU-T G.813.

9.2.3 Free-Run ModeThe OptiX OSN 3500 works under the inherent frequency of its internal crystal oscillator whosefrequency stability is not worse than ±4.6 ppm.

9.3 Clock OutputsThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports three clock output schemes and two external clock outputs.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the following clock outputs:

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Clock

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-3

Page 184: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l Line clock outputs

l Tributary clock outputs

l External clock outputs

NOTE

For tributary clock outputs, the OptiX OSN 3500 supports the tributary retiming function, which helpsimprove the quality of output tributary clock.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports two external clock outputs:

l Two 75-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

l Two 120-ohm external clock outputs (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

NOTE

For external clock outputs, only two 75-ohm or two 120-ohm clocks but never both can be applied.

9.4 Clock ProtectionThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function for managing the SSM. The standard SSM andextended SSM can be configured for clock protection switching.

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the synchronization status message (SSM) function forsynchronous clocks. Either the standard SSM or the extended SSM can be configured to realizethe protection switching of clocks.

9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not EnabledFor the OptiX OSN 3500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used.In this case, the clock sources are chosen or switched according to the priority list. The clocksource with the highest priority is the tracing source.

9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM EnabledThe standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest qualityto avoid the generation of clock lock ring.

9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM EnabledThe standard SSM cannot avoid the clock lock ring in all cases. For this, Huawei presents theconcept of the clock source ID.

9.4.1 Clock Configuration with SSM Not EnabledFor the OptiX OSN 3500, when the SSM is not enabled, it indicates that the S1 byte is not used.In this case, the clock sources are chosen or switched according to the priority list. The clocksource with the highest priority is the tracing source.

The priority list can be manually configured. Figure 9-1 shows the clock configuration and thepriority list when the SSM is not enabled.

9 ClockOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

9-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 185: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 9-1 Clock networking with SSM not enabled

Slot 8 Slot 11

Slot 11 Slot 8

Slot 8

Slot 11

Slot 11

Slot 8

BITS

Node 2Priority 1: Slot 11Priority 2: Slot 8Priority 3: Internal

Node 3Priority 1: Slot 11Priority 2: Slot 8Priority 3: Internal

Node 1Priority 1: BITSPriority 2: Internal

Node 4Priority 1: Slot 11Priority 2: Slot 8Priority 3: Internal

Clock tracing

9.4.2 Clock Configuration with Standard SSM EnabledThe standard SSM allows the OptiX OSN 3500 to choose the clock source of the highest qualityto avoid the generation of clock lock ring.

Figure 9-2 shows the application of the standard SSM.

Figure 9-2 Application of the standard SSM

Slot 8 Slot 11

Slot 11 Slot 8

Slot 8

Slot 11

Slot 11

Slot 8

BITS

Fibrebreak

Node 3, Node 2 will automaticallyselect the clock source of best quality.

Node 2

Node 1

Node 3

Node 4

Clocktracing

9.4.3 Clock Configuration with Extended SSM EnabledThe standard SSM cannot avoid the clock lock ring in all cases. For this, Huawei presents theconcept of the clock source ID.

The extended SSM uses the first four bits of the S1 byte as the clock source ID and the latterfour bits to indicate quality of the clock source. The first four bits of the S1 byte is used to specifya unique ID for a clock source. These four bits are transmitted along with the SSM. Whenreceiving the S1 byte, a node checks if the clock source ID is transmitted by itself. If yes, thenode takes the clock source as unavailable. In this way, the clock lock ring is avoided. See Figure9-4.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Clock

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-5

Page 186: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 9-3 Clock lock ring formed when the standard SSM is enabled

BITSBITSfailure

Clock mutual tracingcaused by BITS failure

Node 2

Node 1

Node 3

Node 4

BITS

Node 2

Node 1

Node 3

Node 4

Clocktracing

Figure 9-4 Application of clock source ID

Node 2

BITS failureBITS

Node 1

Node 3

Node 4

Node 1 finds that the ID sent from Node 4 is1, which is originated from itself. Node 1 willnot trace it to avoid the clock mutual tracing.Clock tracing

A clock source ID can be manually set. In the case of configuration of clock protection for anSDH ring network, the clock ID is always manually set, to effectively avoid the occurrence ofclock lock ring. The clock ID is necessary only at key nodes rather than all nodes in an SDHnetwork. Follow the listed rules to set the clock source ID.

l Allocate a clock ID for every external BITS.

l Allocate a clock ID for the internal clock source of every node that has an external BITS.

l In case signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for theinternal clock source of every junction node.

l In case signals travel from a chain or a ring into another ring, allocate a clock ID for theline clock source (if any is involved at a junction node) in the signal traveling direction atevery junction node.

9.5 Tributary RetimingThe retiming function is performed to combine service data and reference timing signals froma digital synchronization network, and then to transmit them together to the customer.

9.5.1 Retiming PrincipleWith the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmitreference timing signals.

9 ClockOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

9-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 187: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

9.5.2 Application of the Retiming FunctionPDH signals can pass through an SDH network without retiming or with retiming.

9.5.1 Retiming PrincipleWith the retiming technology, the 2048 kbit/s tributary in an SDH system is able to transmitreference timing signals.

Figure 9-5 shows the retiming principle.

Figure 9-5 Retiming principle diagram

Desynchronization

PLL

Retiming buffer

SECSDH clock

source

Extract clock(f )

Extract clock(f )

ff

Input tributary signal Outputtributary signal

1

01

0

The retiming function is performed in the following process:

l The phase-lock loop (PLL) is used to extract clock f1 from the received tributary signals.

l The desynchronization function is used to recover the tributary signal data in an error-freemanner, and then to store the data into the retiming buffer.

l The SDH equipment clock (SEC) f0, which is synchronous with the digital synchronizationnetwork, is extracted and then added into the tributary signal data.

l In this way, the output tributary signals carry a good timing reference, which serves thesynchronous service equipment.

9.5.2 Application of the Retiming FunctionPDH signals can pass through an SDH network without retiming or with retiming.

PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network Without RetimingFigure 9-6 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network without retiming. Onsynchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid periodical slip.When PDH signals are adapted into the SDH transmission network, pointer justifications causephase jumps of output PDH signals, and thus frequency f1 of the output PDH signals becomesasynchronous with f0. As a result, the frequency of output signals cannot be used as a timingreference for equipment k, such as a digital stored program control (SPC) switch.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 9 Clock

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 9-7

Page 188: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Figure 9-6 SDH transmission network without retiming

The tributary signalfrequency cannot be usedas a synchronization clock

for equipment k.

SDH transmission network

Synchronousservice

equipment i

S

S

SS SDH

MUX

Synchronousservice

equipment k

PRC

D

D

D

DSDHMUX

f1

f1

f0 f0

f1

f1: PDH PDH signal frequencyf0 : Frequency that traces an SDH PRCS: SynchronizationD: DesynchronizationR: RetimingPRC : SDH primary reference clock

PDH Signals Passing Through an SDH Network with RetimingFigure 9-7 shows how PDH signals pass through an SDH network with retiming. Onsynchronous service equipment i, the reference frequency f1 locks on f0 to avoid periodical slip.At the network output end, the retiming function provides a local timing reference f0, and thusjitters and wanders caused by pointer justifications are absorbed. Frequency f1 of the output PDHsignals is still synchronous with f0, so equipment k can extract tributary timing signals for thesynchronization purpose.

Figure 9-7 SDH transmission network with retiming

Synchronousservice

equipmentk

The tributary signal frequency canbe used as a synchronization clock

for equipment k.

Synchronousservice

equipmenti

S

S

SS SDH

MUX

PRC

R

SDHMUX

f1

f0

f0 f0

f1

f1: PDH signal frequencyf0: Frequency that traces an SDH PRC

SEC

D

D

DD

Transmission network

PRC: SDH primary reference clock

S: SynchronizationD: DesynchronizationR: Retiming

f0

SEC: SDH equipment clock

The transmission network in Figure 9-7 can be a single SDH network, or a combination ofseveral SDH and PDH networks.

9 ClockOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

9-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 189: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

10 OAM

About This Chapter

The OptiX OSN 3500 provides maintenance and management functions.

10.1 Operation and MaintenanceThe cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed withconsideration of the customer requirements for easy operation and maintenance of theequipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenancecapability for customers.

10.2 Network ManagementThe OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission networkmanagement system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-TRecommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE softwarethrough the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the networkequipment.

10.3 Security ManagementThe T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 10 OAM

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-1

Page 190: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

10.1 Operation and MaintenanceThe cabinet, boards and functions of the OptiX OSN 3500 system are designed withconsideration of the customer requirements for easy operation and maintenance of theequipment. Hence, the OptiX OSN 3500 system provides powerful equipment maintenancecapability for customers.l In the case of any emergency, the GSCC board generates audible and visual alarms to urge

the network administrators to take proper measures.l The OptiX OSN 3500 provides 16 alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, four

output interfaces for cabinet alarm indicators, and alarm concatenation interfaces tofacilitate operation and maintenance of the equipment.

l Each board provides running and alarm indicators to help the network administrators tolocate and handle faults as soon as possible.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function for the SDHand Ethernet single-mode optical interfaces.– When a fiber that connects two optical interfaces is cut, an R-LOS alarm is raised at the

optical interface of the local end. If the R_LOS alarm lasts for 500 ms, the laser of thetransmit optical interface at the local end is automatically shut down. By default, thelaser pulse is generated at 60-second intervals and lasts for 2s every time.

– After the fiber connection recovers, the optical interface at the opposite end detects thelaser pulse generated from the local end. The laser of the optical interface at the oppositeend then continuously launches laser beams. After receiving the laser beam launchedby the opposite end, the laser of the local end then also continuously launches laserbeam. As a result, the two optical interfaces can communicate with each other and theR-LOS alarm is cleared.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 supports in-service detection of the optical power of SDH andEthernet optical interfaces.

l Each line board has the function to monitor lower order alarms. The TU-AIS and TU_LOPalarms can be monitored.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the function to query the parameters of the SDH opticalmodule. The parameters that can be queried include optical interface type, fiber mode(single-mode or multi-mode), transmission distance, transmission rate and wavelength.

l The optical interface board uses the pluggable optical module. Users can choose single-mode or multi-mode optical modules as required. This facilitates the maintenance.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 provides the orderwire phone function for management personnelat different node sites to communicate with each other.

l The T2000 can be used to dynamically monitor the equipment running status and alarmsof each NE in a network.

l The in-service upgrade of the board and the in-service loading of NE software aresupported. The board software and the FPGA can be remotely loaded with the error-proofloading and resumable loading functions.

l The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the remote maintenance function. When the equipmentbecomes faulty, the maintenance personnel can use the public phone network to remotelymaintain the OptiX OSN 3500 system.

l The N1PQ1, N1PQM, N2PQ1, line boards and cross-connect boards support the PRBS testand the remote bit error test.

10 OAMOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

10-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 191: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

10.2 Network ManagementThe OptiX OSN 3500 is uniformly managed by the iManager series transmission networkmanagement system (hereinafter referred to as the T2000). The T2000 manages the OSN, SDH,Metro and DWDM equipment in the entire network. In compliance with ITU-TRecommendations, the T2000 adopts a standard management information model and the object-oriented management technology. The T2000 exchanges information with the NE softwarethrough the communication module, to implement monitoring and management over the networkequipment.

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports the simple network management protocol (SNMP) protocol,which solves the uniform NMS problem for the networking of equipment from different vendors.

10.3 Security ManagementThe T2000 uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 3500 NE.

The T2000 performs the security management over the OptiX OSN 3500 NE in the followingways:

l NE user management

l NE login management

l NE login lockout

l NE setting lockout

l NE user group management

l NE security parameters

l NE security log– Query the users that login to the NE

– Delete an NE user

– Force an NE user out of the login state

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 10 OAM

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 10-3

Page 192: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)
Page 193: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

11 Technical Specifications

About This Chapter

The technical specifications cover the specifications of optical interfaces, electrical interfacesand environment.

11.1 Interface TypesThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types.

11.2 Specifications of the Optical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATMoptical interfaces. This section lists specifications of these optical interfaces.

11.3 Specifications of Electrical InterfacesThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliaryinterfaces.

11.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies withrelated ITU-T Recommendations.

11.5 Transmission PerformanceThe transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards.

11.6 Timeslot NumberingThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.

11.7 Power Supply SpecificationTHe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of –48 V or –60 V DC power supply.

11.8 Power Consumption and Weight of BoardsDifferent boards have different power consumption and weight.

11.9 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThe OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) related tests.

11.10 Safety CertificationThe OptiX OSN 3500 receives several safety certifications.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-1

Page 194: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

11.11 Environmental SpecificationThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper environment for normal operation.

11.12 Environment RequirementThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires different environment for storage, transportation and operating.This section lists the environment requirements accordingly.

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 195: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

11.1 Interface TypesThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports optical interfaces of different types.

Table 11-1 lists the optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-1 Optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Interface Type Rate and Feature

SDH optical interface 155520kbit/s, 622080kbit/s, 2488320kbit/s, 2666057 kbit/s,9953280kbit/s, 10.71Gbit/s

Ethernet interface 10/100Base-TX, 100Base-FX, 1000Base-SX, 1000Base-LX,1000Base-ZX

ATM interface 34368 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s, 622080 kbit/s

PDH/SDH electricalinterface

1544 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 34368 kbit/s, 44736 kbit/s, 139264 kbit/s,155520 kbit/s

DDN electricalinterface

RS232, RS449, EIA530, EIA530-A, V.35, V.24, X.21, Framed E1

Clock interface Two 75-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)Two 120-ohm clock interfaces (2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz)

Alarm interface Sixteen alarm input interfaces, four alarm output interfaces, alarmconcatenated interfaces, four cabinet alarm indicator interfaces

Auxiliary interface Administration interface, orderwire interface, data interface

11.2 Specifications of the Optical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces, Ethernet optical interfaces and ATMoptical interfaces. This section lists specifications of these optical interfaces.

11.2.1 SDH Optical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.

11.2.2 Ethernet Optical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.

11.2.3 ATM Optical InterfaceThe ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.

11.2.4 Laser Safety ClassThe safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.

11.2.1 SDH Optical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports SDH optical interfaces of different types.

Table 11-2 lists the specifications for the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-3

Page 196: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-2 Specifications of the STM-1 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s

Classification code I-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

Operating wavelength(nm)

1260 to1360

1261 to1360

1263 to1360

1480 to1580

1480 to1580

Source type MLM MLM MLM/SLM

SLM SLM

Mean launched power(dBm)

–15 to –8 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

–23 –28 –34 –34 –34

Minimum overload(dBm)

–8 –8 –10 –10 –10

Minimum extinctionratio (dB)

8.2 8.2 10 10 10

Table 11-3 lists the specifications for the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-3 Specifications of the STM-4 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s

Classification code I-4 S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

Operating wavelength (nm) 1261 to1360

1274 to1356

1280 to1335

1480 to1580

1480 to1580

Type of optical source MLM MLM SLM SLM SLM

Mean launched power (dBm) –15 to –8 –15 to –8 –3 to 2 –3 to 2 –3 to 2

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

–23 –28 –28 –28 –34

Minimum overload (dBm) –8 –8 –8 –8 –13

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

8.2 8.2 10 10 10.5

Table 11-4 lists the specifications for the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 197: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-4 Specifications of the STM-16 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2488320 kbit/s

Classificationcode

I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

L-16.2(Je)

V-16.2(Je) (BA)

U-16.2(Je)(BA+PA)

Type of opticalsource

MLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM

Operatingwavelength(nm)

1266to1360

1260 to1360

1280 to1335

1500to1580

1530to1560

1530 to1565

1550.12

Mean launchedpower (dBm)

–10 to–3

–5 to 0 –2 to 3 –2 to 3 5 to 7 WithoutBA: –2 to3

WithoutBA andPA: –2 to 3

With BA:13 to 15

With BA:15 to 18

Receiverminimumsensitivity(dBm)

–18 –18 –27 –28 –28 –28 WithoutBA andPA: –28

With PA: –32

Minimumoverload (dBm)

–3 0 –9 –9 –9 –9 WithoutBA andPA: –9

With PA: –10

Minimumextinction ratio(dB)

8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Maximumchromaticdispersion (ps/nm)

12 - - 1200to1600

2000 2800 3400

Table 11-5 lists the specifications for the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN3500.

Table 11-5 Specifications of the STM-16 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2.66 Gbit/s

Classification code Ue-16.2c Ue-16.2d Ue-16.2f

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-5

Page 198: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Item Specification

Classification code a SF16+BA(14dB)+PA

SF16+BA(17dB)+PA

SF16+BA(17dB)+RA+PA

Operating wavelength (nm) 1550.12 nm

Mean launched power (dBm) Without BA andPA: –5 to –1

Without BA andPA: –5 to –1

Without BA, RA andPA: –5 to –1

With BA: 13 to15

With BA: 13 to15

With BA: 15 to 18

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

Without BA andPA: –27.5

Without BA andPA: –27.5

Without BA, RA andPA: –27.5

With PA: –37 With PA: –37 With PA: –42

Minimum overload point(dBm) b

–10 –10 –10

Minimum extinction ratio(dB) c

10 10 10

a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14)indicates that the optical power of the signal after amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA+PA" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA and PA.b: The parameter is that of the PA.c: Parameters in the table are of the optical modules, excluding the amplifiers.

Table 11-6 lists the specifications for the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-6 Specifications of the STM-64 optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bitrate

9953280 kbit/s

Classificationcode

I-64.1 I-64.2 S-64.2b L-64.2b(BA)

Le-64.2 Ls-64.2

V-64.2b(BA +PA+DCU)

Operatingwavelength(nm)

1290 to1330

1530 to1565

1530 to1565

1530 to1565

1530 to1565

1530 to1565

1550.12

Source type SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM SLM

Meanlaunchedpower (dBm)

–6 to –1

–5 to –1

–1 to 2 WithoutBA: –4to 2

2 to 4 4 to 7 WithoutBA, PA andDCU: –4 to–1

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-6 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 199: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Item Specification

WithBA: 13to 15

With BA: 13to 15

Receiverminimumsensitivity(dBm)

–11 –14 –14 –14 –21 –21 WithoutBA, PA andDCU: –14

With PA: –26

Minimumoverload point(dBm)

–1 –1 –1 –1 –8 –8 –1

Minimumextinction ratio(dB)

6 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

Maximumchromaticdispersion (ps/nm)

6.6 500 800 1600 1200 1600 2040 (withDCU)

Table 11-7 lists the specifications for the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN3500.

Table 11-7 Specifications of the STM-64 (FEC) optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 10.71 Gbit/s

Classification code Ue-64.2c Ue-64.2d Ue-64.2e

Code content a FEC+BA(14dB)+PA+DCU(60+80)c

FEC+BA(17Db)+PA+DCU(80 x 2)

FEC+BA(17dB)+RA+PA+DCU(60 x 3)

Operatingwavelength (nm)

1550.12nm

Source type SLM

Mean launchedpower (dBm)b

–4 to –1 –4 to –1 –4 to –1

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)b

–14 –14 –14

Minimum overloadpoint (dBm)b

–1 –1 –1

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-7

Page 200: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Item Specification

Minimumextinction ratio(dB)b

10 10 10

Dispersion capacity(ps/nm)b

800 800 800

a: The number in the bracket indicates the corresponding parameter, for example, BA (14)indicates that the optical power of the signal after amplified by the BA is 14 dBm. "FEC+BA+PA+DCU" indicates that the optical interface specifications include FEC, BA, PA and DCU.b: The parameters in the table are for only for the optical module, not for the amplifier andthe DCU.c: The parameter indicates different distances corresponding to different dispersioncompensation values.

The STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500 can output wavelengthsthat comply with ITU-T G.694.1. The output wavelengths can be directly added to the WDMsystem. Table 11-8 lists wavelengths and frequencies of the STM-16 and STM-64 opticalinterfaces.

Table 11-8 Wavelengths and frequencies of STM-16 and STM-64 optical interfaces

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength(nm)

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength (nm)

1 192.1 1560.61 21 194.1 1544.53

2 192.2 1559.79 22 194.2 1543.73

3 192.3 1558.98 23 194.3 1542.94

4 192.4 1558.17 24 194.4 1542.14

5 192.5 1557.36 25 194.5 1541.35

6 192.6 1556.56 26 194.6 1540.56

7 192.7 1555.75 27 194.7 1539.77

8 192.8 1554.94 28 194.8 1538.98

9 192.9 1554.13 29 194.9 1538.19

10 193.0 1553.33 30 195.0 1537.40

11 193.1 1552.52 31 195.1 1536.61

12 193.2 1551.72 32 195.2 1535.82

13 193.3 1550.92 33 195.3 1535.04

14 193.4 1550.12 34 195.4 1534.25

15 193.5 1549.32 35 195.5 1533.47

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-8 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 201: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength(nm)

No. Frequency(THz)

Wavelength (nm)

16 193.6 1548.51 36 195.6 1532.68

17 193.7 1547.72 37 195.7 1531.90

18 193.8 1546.92 38 195.8 1531.12

19 193.9 1546.12 39 195.9 1530.33

20 194.0 1545.32 40 196.0 1529.55

Table 11-9 lists the specifications of the colored optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-9 Specifications of the colored optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 2 488 320 kbit/s 2 666 057 kbit/s 9 953 280 kbit/s

Dispersion limit (km) 170 640 640 40

Mean launched power(dBm)

–2 to 3 –5 to –1 –5 to –1 –4 to –1

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

–28 –28 –28 –14

Minimum overload point(dBm)

–9 –9 –9 –1

Maximum chromaticdispersion (ps/nm)

3400 12800 12800 800

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

8.2 10 10 10

OSNR With FEC: 16 With FEC: 20

Without FEC: 21 Without FEC: 26

11.2.2 Ethernet Optical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports Ethernet optical interfaces of different types.

The specification of the Ethernet optical interface of the OptiX OSN 3500 equipment complywith IEEE 802.3z and IEEE 802.3u standards. Table 11-10 lists the specifications.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-9

Page 202: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-10 Specifications of Ethernet optical interfaces

Interface Type SourceType

TransmittingOpticalPower(dBm)

CentralWavelength(nm)

MinimumOverload Point(dBm)

ReceiverMinimumSensitivity (dBm)

MinimumExtinction Ratio(dB)

1000Base-ZX(70 km)

MLM –4 to 2 1480 to1580

–3 –22 9

1000Base-ZX(40 km)

MLM –2 to 5 1270 to1355

–3 –23 9

1000Base-LX(10 km)

MLM –9 to –3 1270 to1355

–3 –19 9

1000Base-SX(0.55 km)

MLM –9.5 to 0 770 to860

0 –17 9

100Base-FX (15km)

MLM –15 to –8 1261 to1360

–7 –28 10

100Base-FX (2km)

MLM –19 to –14

1270 to1380

–14 –30 10

11.2.3 ATM Optical InterfaceThe ATM optical interfaces include STM-1 and STM-4 ATM optical interfaces.

Table 11-11 and Table 11-12 list the specifications of the ATM optical interfaces of the OptiXOSN 3500.

Table 11-11 Performance of the STM-1 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s

Classification code Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Ve-1.2

Operating wavelength(nm)

1260 to1360

1261 to1360

1263 to1360

1480 to1580

1480 to1580

Optical source type MLM MLM MLM/SLM

SLM SLM

Mean launched power(dBm)

–19 to –14 –15 to –8 –5 to 0 –5 to 0 –3 to 0

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

–31 –28 –34 –34 –34

Minimum overload(dBm)

–14 –8 –10 –10 –10

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-10 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 203: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Item Specification

Minimum extinction ratio(dB)

10 8.2 10 10 10

Table 11-12 Performance of the STM-4 ATM optical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500

Item Specification

Nominal bit rate 622080 kbit/s

Classification code S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Ve-4.2

Operating wavelength(nm)

1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580 1480 to 1580

Optical source type MLM SLM SLM SLM

Mean launched power(dBm)

-15 to -8 -3 to 2 -3 to 2 -3 to 2

Receiver minimumsensitivity (dBm)

–28 –28 –28 –34

Minimum overload(dBm)

–8 –8 –8 –13

Minimum extinctionratio (dB)

8.2 10 10 10.5

11.2.4 Laser Safety ClassThe safety class of the laser on each board is CLASS 1 or CLASS 1M.

Table 11-13 lists the safety classes of lasers used for the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-13 Laser safety class

Laser SafetyClass

Board

CLASS 1 N1SL64, N2SL64, N1SF64, N1SLD64, N1SL16, N2SL16, N3SL16,N3SL16A, N2SLQ16, N1SF16, N1SL4, N2SL4, N1SLQ4, N2SLQ4,N1SLD4, N2SLD4, N1SLT1, N1SLQ1, N2SLQ1, N1SL1, N2SL1,N1SLH1, N2SLO1, N1EGT2, N1EGS2, N2EGS2, N1EMS4, N1EGS4,N2EGR2, N1EMR0, N2EMR0, N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, N1IDQ1,N1MST4, N1OU08, N2OU08, N1EFF8

CLASS 1M BA2, BPA, 61COA, N1COA, 62COA, N1FIB, ROP, N1MR2A,N1MR2C, N1LWX, TN11OBU1, TN11MR2, TN11MR4, TN11CMR2,TN11CMR4

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-11

Page 204: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

11.3 Specifications of Electrical InterfacesThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces, DDN electrical interfaces and auxiliaryinterfaces.

11.3.1 PDH Electrical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.

11.3.2 DDN InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces.

11.3.3 Auxiliary InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.

11.3.1 PDH Electrical InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports PDH electrical interfaces of several types.

Table 11-14 lists the specifications of the PDH electrical interfaces of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-14 Specifications of PDH electrical interfaces

Interface Type 1544kbit/s

2048kbit/s

34368kbit/s

44736kbit/s

139264kbit/s

155520kbit/s

Code B8ZS,AMI

HDB3 HDB3 B3ZS CMI CMI

Signal bit rate atthe outputinterface

ITU-T G.703-compliant

ITU-T G.703-compliant

Attenuationtolerance at theinput interface

Frequencydeviationtolerance at theinput interface

Anti-interferencecapability ofinput interface

- - - -

11.3.2 DDN InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports DDN interfaces.

Table 11-15 lists the DDN interface types.

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-12 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 205: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-15 DDN interface types

Interface Type Description Standard

Framed E1interface type

Framed E1 signal Physical and electrical features comply with ITU-TG.703. The frame structure complies with ITU-T G.704.

N x 64 kbit/sinterface

V.35 interface Complies with ITU-T V.35.

V.24 interface Complies with ITU-T V.24.

X.21 interface Complies with ITU-T X.21.

RS-449 interface Complies with EIA RS-449 (RS-423A, RS-422A).

RS-530 interface Complies with EIA RS-530.

RS-530Ainterface

Complies with EIA RS-530A.

11.3.3 Auxiliary InterfaceThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides many auxiliary interfaces.

64 kbit/s InterfaceTable 11-16 lists the specifications of the 64 kbit/s electrical interface, which is the F1 interfaceon the AUX board.

Table 11-16 Specifications of the 64 kbit/s interface

Item Specification

Bit rate 64 kbit/s

Timing signal From RX

Coding style ITU-U G.703

Outgoing pulse shape ITU-U G.703

Output interface characteristic ITU-U G.703

Incoming interface characteristic ITU-U G.703

RS-232 InterfacesTable 11-17 lists the specifications of the RS-232 electrical interfaces.The RS-232 interfacesare S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-13

Page 206: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-17 Specifications of the RS-232 interfaces

Item Specification

Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum

Mode RS-232 Tx & Rx data only

Electrical level ±5 V to ±15 V

RS-422 Interfaces

Table 11-18 lists the specifications of the RS-422 electrical interfaces.The RS-422 interfacesare S1, S2, S3 and S4 interfaces on the AUX.

Table 11-18 Specifications of the RS-422 interfaces

Item Specification

Bit rate 19.2 kbit/s to the maximum

Mode RS-422 Tx & Rx data only

Electrical level ±2.0 V

Orderwire Phone Interface

Table 11-19 lists the specifications of the orderwire phone interfaces.

Table 11-19 Specifications of the orderwire phone interface

Item Specification

Speech channel interface

Impedance 600 ohms

Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz

Operating current 18 mA

Input gain –4/0/0 dB

Output gain 0/–7/0 dB

Signaling DTMF compliant with ITU-T Q.23

Analog EOW extension

Impedance 600 ohms

Bandwidth 300 Hz to 3400 Hz

Tx level –3.5±1 dBr

Rx level –3.5±1 dBr

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-14 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 207: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

11.4 Clock Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe clock interfaces and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies withrelated ITU-T Recommendations.

11.4.1 Clock Interface TypeThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces.

11.4.2 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G.813.

11.4.1 Clock Interface TypeThe OptiX OSN 3500 provides the external clock input interfaces and clock output interfaces.

Table 11-20 lists the clock features of the OptiX OSN 3500.

Table 11-20 Clock features

Clock Type Feature

Externalsynchronizationsource

Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputsTwo 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock inputs

Synchronizationoutput

Two 75-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputsTwo 120-ohm 2048 kbit/s (G.703) or 2048 kHz (G.703) clock outputs

11.4.2 Timing and Synchronization PerformanceThe timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T G.813.

Table 11-21 lists the timing and synchronization performance of the OptiX OSN 3500equipment.

Table 11-21 Timing and synchronization performance

Output Jitter Output Frequency of InternalOscillator in Free-Run Mode

Long-Term Phase Variationin Locked Mode

G.813 compliant G.813 compliant G.813 compliant

11.5 Transmission PerformanceThe transmission performance of the OptiX OSN 3500 complies with ITU-T standards.

Table 11-22 lists the performance of the output jitter and bit error in an SDH/PDH network.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-15

Page 208: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-22 Transmission performance

Jitter at STM-N Interface Jitter at PDH Interface Bit Error

G.813/G.825 compliant G.823/G.783 compliant G.826 compliant

11.6 Timeslot NumberingThe OptiX OSN 3500 supports two numbering schemes for TU-12.

Table 11-23 and Table 11-24 list the details.

Table 11-23 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme I)

TUG2(7-1)

TUG2(7-2)

TUG2(7-3)

TUG(7-4)

TUG(7-5)

TUG(7-6)

TUG(7-7)

TU-3 (3-1) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

TU-3 (3-2) 22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

TU-3 (3-3) 43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

60

61

62

63

Table 11-24 Numbering TU-12s in a VC-4 (scheme II)

TUG2(7-1)

TUG2(7-2)

TUG2(7-3)

TUG2(7-4)

TUG2(7-5)

TUG2(7-6)

TUG2(7-7)

TU-3 (3-1) 1 22

43

4 25

46

7 28

49

10

31

52

13

34

55

16

37

58

19

40

61

TU-3 (3-2) 2 23

44

5 26

47

8 29

50

11

32

53

14

35

56

17

38

59

20

41

62

TU-3 (3-3) 3 24

45

6 27

48

9 30

51

12

33

54

15

36

57

18

39

60

21

42

63

11.7 Power Supply SpecificationTHe OptiX OSN 3500 supports the input of –48 V or –60 V DC power supply.

Table 11-25 lists the specifications of the power supply.

Table 11-25 Power supply specifications

Item Specification

Power supply mode DC power supply

Nominal voltage –48 V or –60 V

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-16 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 209: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Item Specification

Voltage range –38.4 V to –57.6 V or –48 V to –72 V

Max. power consumption 1100 Wa

600 W

Max. current 20 A

a: This value indicates the maximum power consumption for the enhanced subrack.

11.8 Power Consumption and Weight of BoardsDifferent boards have different power consumption and weight.

Table 11-26 lists the power consumption and weight of boards.

Table 11-26 Power consumption and weight of boards

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)

N1SL64 30 1.12 N1TSB8

5 0.28

N2SL64 32 1.12 N1TSB4

2.5 0.28

N1SLD64a

41.2 1.18 N3SL16A

17.39 0.91

N1SL16 20 1.10 N2SLQ16

35 1.05

N3SL16 21.61 1.09 N1EGS2

40 1.04

N2SL16 20 1.10 N2PD3 12 0.92

N1SLQ4 16 1.04 N2PL3A

12 0.9

N2PQ3 12.6 0.92 N2EGS2

43.2 1.04

N2PL3 12 0.92 N1EGT2

23 0.90

N2SLQ4 16 1.04 N1EFS0 35 0.98

N1SLD4 15 1.01 N2EFS0 35 0.98

N2SLD4 15 1.01 N4EFS0 35 0.98

N1SL4 15 1.00 N1EFS4 30 0.98

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-17

Page 210: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)

N2SL4 15 1.00 N2EFS4 30 0.98

N1SLQ1 15 1.04 N1EMR0

50 1.20

N2SLQ1 15 1.04 N2EMR0

50 1.20

N1SL1 14 1.00 N2EGR2

54 1.10

N2SL1 14 1.00 N1EFT8A

21 0.97

N1SLH1 22 1.04 N1ETF8 2 0.37

N2SLO1 26.15 1.082 N1EFF8 6 0.44

N1BA2 20 1.01 N1ADL4

35 0.90

N1BPA 20 1.01 N1ADQ1

37 0.95

DCU 0 0.42 N1MST4

40 0.90

N1SEP1 17 0.95 N1SXCSA

63 1.872

N1EU08 11 0.41 N1SXCSB

63 1.901

N1OU08,N2OU08

6 0.41 N1GXCSA

27 1.81

N1EU04 6 0.4 N1EXCSA

62 2.00

N1SPQ4 24 0.91 N1UXCSA/B

65 2.00

N2SPQ4 24 0.91 N1IXCSB

93.656 2.112

N1MU04

2 0.41 N1XCE 25 1.50

N1IXCSA

93.656 2.103 N1GSCC

10 0.88

N1PD3 19 1.12 N3GSCC

20 0.946

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-18 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 211: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)

Board PowerConsumption(W)

Weight(kg)

N1PL3 15 1.00 N1FIB 0 0.755

N1D34S 2 0.38 N1AUX 19 0.96

N1C34S 2 0.31 N1FAN 16 x 3 1.50 x 3

N1PQM 22 1.01 N1FANA

30 x 3 1.50 x 3

N2PQ1 13 1.003 N1PIU 8 1.15

N1PQ1 19 1.01 N1MR2A

0 1.01

N1D75S 5.5 0.35 N1MR2C

0 1.01

N1D12S 9 0.35 N1LWX 30 1.10

N1PL3A 15 1.00 N1ETS8 2.5 0.37

N1SLT1 15 1.22 N1EFT8 26 1.01

N1SF16 26 1.09 N1IDQ1 36.6 1.01

N1D12B 1 0.31 N1IDL4 36.6 1.01

N1EMS4

65 (withoutinterface board)

1.10 N1EGS4

65 1.10

75 (with interfaceboard)

N1DX1b 25 0.962 TN11MR2

0.2 0.9

N1DXA 25 0.848 TN11CMR2

0.2 0.8

TN11OBU1

16 1.3 TN11CMR4

0.2 0.9

TN11MR4

0.2 0.9 N1SLD16

20 1.10

a: If the transmission distance of the optical module on the N1SLD64 board is 2 km, its powerconsumption is 41.2 W.b: After the TPS is performed, the power consumption of the N1DX1 board is 31 W.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-19

Page 212: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

11.9 Electromagnetic CompatibilityThe OptiX OSN 3500 is designed in accordance with the ETS 300 386 and ETS 300 127standards stipulated by the ETSI. The equipment has passed electromagnetic compatibility(EMC) related tests.

Table 11-27 lists the EMC-related test specifications.

Table 11-27 EMC test results

Item Standard Result

Radiated emission CISPR22 ClassAEN55022 Class A

Passed

Conducted emission for DC port CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A

Passed

Conducted emission for signal ports CISPR22 Class AEN55022 Class A

Passed

Immunity to radiated electric field ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-3 (10 V/m)

Passed

Immunity to electrostatic discharge ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-2 (Air discharge: 8kV; contact discharge: 6 kV)

Passed

Immunity to electrical fast transientbursts for DC ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-4 (2 kV)

Passed

Immunity to electrical fast transientbursts for signal ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-4 (2 kV)

Passed

Immunity to surges for DC ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-5 (4 kV)

Passed

Immunity to surges for signal ports ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-5 (1 kV)

Passed

Immunity to continuous conductedinterference for DC ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)

Passed

Immunity to continuous conductedinterference for signal ports

ETSI EN 300 386 V1.3.2IEC 61000-4-6 (10 V)

Passed

11.10 Safety CertificationThe OptiX OSN 3500 receives several safety certifications.

Table 11-28 lists the safety certifications that the OptiX OSN 3500 has received.

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-20 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 213: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-28 Safety certifications

Item Standard

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) CISPR22 Class ACISPR24EN55022 Class AEN50024ETSI EN 300 386 Class AETSI ES 201 468CFR 47 FCC Part 15 Class AICES 003 Class AAS/NZS CISPR22 Class AGB9254 Class AVCCI Class A

Safety IEC 60950-1IEC/EN41003EN 60950-1UL 60950-1CSA C22.2 No 60950-1AS/NZS 60950-1BS EN 60950-1IS 13252GB4943

Laser safety FDA rules21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11IEC60825-1IEC60825-2EN60825-1EN60825-2GB7247

Health ICNIRP Guideline1999-519-ECEN 50385OET Bulletin 65IEEE Std C95.1

Environment protection RoHS

11.11 Environmental SpecificationThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper environment for normal operation.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-21

Page 214: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

The OptiX OSN 3500 can operate normally in a long term in the environment defined in Table11-29.

Table 11-29 Environment specifications for long-term operation

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature 0℃ to 45℃

Relative humidity 10% to 90%

Anti-seismicperformance

Capable of protecting itself against 7 to 9 Richter scale earthquake

11.12 Environment RequirementThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires different environment for storage, transportation and operating.This section lists the environment requirements accordingly.

The following international standards are taken as the reference for specifying the environmentrequirements.

l GF 014-95: Environment conditions for the communication equipment room

l ETS (European Telecommunication Standards) 300 019-1-3: Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location

l NEBS GR-63-CORE: Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:Physical Protection

11.12.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for storage.

11.12.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for transportation.

11.12.3 Environment for OperationThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for operating.

11.12.1 Environment for StorageThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for storage.

ClimateTable 11-30 lists the climate requirements for storage.

Table 11-30 Climate requirements for storage

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 5000 m

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-22 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 215: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Item Range

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature –40℃ to +70℃

Temperature change rate ≤ 1 ℃/min

Relative humidity 10% to 100%

Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2

Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirement

Requirement for storing equipment on the customer site: Generally, the equipment must bestored indoors.

No water should remain on the floor or leak to the equipment carton. The equipment should beplaced away from places where water leakage is possible, such as near the auto fire-fightingfacilities and heating facilities.

If the equipment is stored outdoors, the following four conditions are required.

l The carton must be intact.

l Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton.

l No water is on the ground where the carton is placed.

l The carton must be free from direct exposure to sunshine.

Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.

l Keep rodents such as mice away.

Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive

dust.l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined

by Table 11-31.

Table 11-31 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during storage

Mechanical Active Substance Content

Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3

Precipitable dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 300 mg/m3

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-23

Page 216: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined byTable 11-32.

Table 11-32 Density requirements for chemical active substances during storage

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical Stress

Table 11-33 lists the requirements for mechanical stress during storage.

Table 11-33 Requirements for mechanical stress during storage

Item Sub-Item Range

Random vibration Acceleration spectraldensity

1 m2/s3 –3 dBA -

Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200Hz

-

Non-steadyimpact

Impact responsespectrum II

≤ 300 m/s2, 11 ms

Static load 0 kPa

NOTEStatic load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package can endure when the equipmentis piled up in a specific manner.

11.12.2 Environment for TransportationThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for transportation.

Climate

Table 11-34 lists the climate requirements for transportation.

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-24 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 217: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-34 Climate requirements for transportation

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 5000 m

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature –40℃ to +70℃

Temperature change rate ≤ 3℃/min

Relative humidity 10% to 100%

Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2

Air flowing speed ≤ 30 m/s

Waterproof Requirement

The following conditions are required for the transportation.

l The carton must be intact.

l Required rainproof measures must be taken to prevent water from entering the carton.

l No water remains in the transportation tool.

Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.

l Keep rodents such as mice away.

Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive

dust.

l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements definedby Table 11-35.

Table 11-35 Density requirements for mechanical active substances during transportation

Mechanical Active Substance Content

Suspending dust No requirement

Precipitable dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined byTable 11-36.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-25

Page 218: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-36 Density requirements for chemical active substances during transportation

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Mechanical StressTable 11-37 lists the requirements for transportation of OptiX OSN 3500 equipment.

Table 11-37 Requirements for mechanical stress during transportation

Item Sub-Item Range

Randomvibration

Acceleration spectraldensity

1 m2/s3 –3 dBA -

Frequency range 5 Hz to 20 Hz 20 Hz to 200Hz

-

Non-steadyimpact

Impact responsespectrum II

≤ 300 m/s2, 11 ms

Static load 0 kPa

11.12.3 Environment for OperationThe OptiX OSN 3500 requires proper climate for operating.

ClimateTable 11-38 and Table 11-39 list the climate requirements for operation of the OptiX OSN3500.

Table 11-38 Requirements for temperature and humidity

Temperature Relative Humidity

Long-termoperation

Short-term operation Long-termoperation

Short-term operation

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-26 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 219: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Temperature Relative Humidity

0℃ to 45℃ –5℃ to 55℃ 10% to 90% 5% to 95%

NOTEThe temperature and humidity values are tested in the place 1.5 m above the floor and 0.4 m in front ofthe equipment. Short-term operation means that the consecutive working time of the equipment does notexceed 96 hours, and the accumulated working time every year does not exceed 15 days.

Table 11-39 Other climate requirements

Item Range

Altitude ≤ 4000 m

Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa

Temperature change rate ≤ 5℃/h

Solar radiation ≤ 700 W/s2

Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2

Air flowing speed ≤ 1 m/s

Biological Environmentl Avoid multiplication of microbe, such as eumycete and mycete.

l Keep rodents such as mice away.

Air Cleannessl The air must be free from explosive, electric-conductive, magnetic-conductive or corrosive

dust.l The density of the mechanical active substances complies with the requirements defined

by Table 11-40.

Table 11-40 Requirements for the density of the mechanical active substance

Mechanical ActiveSubstance

Content

Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particles/m3

Suspending dust ≤ 0.4 mg/m3

Precipitable dust ≤ 15 mg/m2·h

Gravel ≤ 100 mg/m3

l The density of the chemical active substances complies with the requirements defined byTable 11-41.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description 11 Technical Specifications

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 11-27

Page 220: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Table 11-41 Density requirements for chemical active substances during operation

Chemical Active Substance Content

SO2 ≤ 0.20 mg/m3

H2S ≤ 0.006 mg/m3

NH3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

Cl2 ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

HCl ≤ 0.10 mg/m3

HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3

O3 ≤ 0.005 mg/m3

CO ≤ 5.0 mg/m3

Mechanical StressTable 11-42 lists the requirements of mechanical stress for operation.

Table 11-42 Requirements for mechanical stress during operation

Item Sub-Item Range

Sinusoidalvibration

Velocity ≤ 5 mm/s -

Acceleration - ≤ 2 m/s2

Frequency range 5 Hz to 62 Hz 62 Hz to 200 Hz

Impact Impact responsespectrum II

Half-sin wave, 30 m/s2, 11 ms

Static load 0 kPa

NOTEStatic load is the pressure from upside, which the equipment with package can endure when the equipmentis piled up in a specific manner.

11 Technical SpecificationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

11-28 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 221: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

A Compliant Standards

This chapter lists the standards that OptiX OSN 3500 conforms to.

A.1 ITU-T Recommendations

A.2 IEEE Standards

A.3 IETF Standards

A.4 Environment Related Standards

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Compliant Standards

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1

Page 222: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

A.1 ITU-T Recommendations

Table A-1 IUT-T recommendations

Recommendation Description

G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers

G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid

G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM wavelength grid

G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates

G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces

G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544, 6312 kbit/s, 2048 kbit/s, 8448 kbit/s and 44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels

G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy(SDH)

G.775 Loss of signal (LOS) and alarm indication signal (AIS) defectdetection and clearance criteria

G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmissionsystems

G.774 1-5 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management informationmodel for the network element view

G.783 Characteristics of synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) equipmentfunctional blocks

G.784 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) management

G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the synchronousdigital hierarchy (SDH)

G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)

G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy

G.824 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy

G.825 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which arebased on the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary rate

G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on thesynchronous digital hierarchy (SDH)

A Compliant StandardsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

A-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 223: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Recommendation Description

G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures

G.842 Cooperation of the SDH network protection structures

G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to thesynchronous digital hierarchy

G.958 Digital line systems based on the synchronous digital hierarchy foruse on optical fiber cables

Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface

Q.812 Upper layer protocol profiles for the Q3-interface

M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network

G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters ofoptical fiber amplifiers

G.662 Generic characteristics of optical fiber amplifier devices and sub-systems

G.663 Application related aspects of optical fiber amplifier devices andsub-systems

X.86 Ethernet over LAPS

G.7041 Generic framing procedure (GFP)

G.7042 Link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS)

I.610 B-ISDN operation and maintenance principles and functions

I.630 ATM protection switching

A.2 IEEE Standards

Table A-2 IEEE standards

Standard Description

IEEE Std 802.3 Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD)access method and physical layer specification

IEEE802.3u Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, mediumattachment units, and repeater for 100 Mb/s operation, type 100Base-T

IEEE 802.3z Media access control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater andmanagement parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation

IEEE802.1q Virtual bridged local area networks

IEEE802.3ad Aggregation of multiple link segments

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description A Compliant Standards

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-3

Page 224: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Standard Description

IEEE802.1D Media access control (MAC) bridges

IEEE802.17 Resilient packet ring access method and physical layer specifications

A.3 IETF Standards

Table A-3 IETF standards

Standard Description

RFC2615(1999) Point-to-point protocol (PPP) over SONET/SDH

RFC1662(1994) PPP in HDLC-like Framing

RFC1661(1994) Point-to-point protocol (PPP)

RFC2514 Definitions of textual conventions and OBJECT-IDENTITIES for ATM management

A.4 Environment Related Standards

Table A-4 Environment related standards

Standard Description

IEC 61000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)

ETS 300 019-1-3 Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location

NEBS GR-63-CORE Network equipment-building system (NEBS) requirements: physicalprotection

A Compliant StandardsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

A-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 225: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

B Glossary

1+1 protection A 1+1 protection architecture has one normal traffic signal, one workingSNC/trail, one protection SNC/trail and a permanent bridge.

1:N protection A 1:N protection architecture has N normal traffic signals, N workingSNCs/trails and one protection SNC/trail. It may have one extra trafficsignal.

3R Regeneration, Retiming, and Reshaping.

A

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A transfer mode in which theinformation is organized into cells; it is asynchronous in the sense thatthe recurrence of cells containing information from an individual useris not necessarily periodic. It is a protocol within the OSI layer 1. AnATM cell consists of a 5 octet header followed by 48 octets of data.

B

Bandwidth That value numerically equal to the lowest frequency at which themagnitude of the baseband transfer function of an optical fibre decreasesto a specified fraction, generally to -3 dB optical (-6 dB electrical), ofthe zero frequency value. NOTE - The bandwidth is limited by severalmechanisms: mainly modal distortion and chromatic dispersion inmultimode fibres.

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply. A building timing supply thatminimizes the number of synchronization links entering an office.Sometimes referred to as a synchronization supply unit.

Build-in WDM A function which integrates some simple WDM systems into the OSNseries products. That is, the OSN products can add and drop severalwavelengths directly.

C

Congestion The condition that exists in a network if the capacity needed for theinstantaneous traffic exceeds the bandwidth available in the network.

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description B Glossary

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-1

Page 226: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Control plane A set of communicating entities that are responsible for theestablishment of connections including set-up, release, supervision andmaintenance. A control plane is supported by a signalling network.

Convergence The process of developing a model of the echo path which will be usedin the echo estimator to produce the estimate of the circuit echo.

Conversion In the context of message handling, a transmittal event in which an MTAtransforms parts of a message content from one encoded informationtype to another, or alters a probe so it appears that the describedmessages were so modified.

D

Distributedtransaction

A transaction, parts of which may be carried out in more than one opensystem.

DNI Dual Node Interconnection. Both ring networks have two nodesinterconnected with each other. DNI not only provides protection forring-cross services but also for either failed node of two interconnectednodes. Therefore, it improves network availability.

E

EPL Ethernet Private Line. An EPL service is a point-to-pointinterconnection between two UNIs without SDH bandwidth sharing.Transport bandwidth is never shared between different customers.

EPLn Ethernet Private LAN. An EPLn service is both a LAN service and aprivate service. Transport bandwidth is never shared between differentcustomers.

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line. An EVPL service is a service that is botha line service and a virtual private service.

EVPLn Ethernet Virtual Private Local Area Network. An EVPLn service is aservice that is both a LAN service and a virtual private service.

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

F

Fairnessalgorithm

A mechanism that enforces fairness among the nodes on the ring. Itapplies only to LP and excess Medium priority traffic coming from theMAC client. Each node is assigned a weight, which allows the user toallocate more ring bandwidth to certain nodes.

FEC Forward error correction, It is a kind of technology for enhancing thereliability of digital transmission. It can increase transmission distanceand improve network performance.

I

B GlossaryOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

B-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 227: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM. The ATM inverse multiplexingtechnique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATMcells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higherbandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the linkrates. This is referred to as an IMA group.

IMA frame The IMA frame is used as the unit of control in the IMA protocol. It isa logical frame defined as M consecutive cells, numbered 0 to M-l,transmitted on each of the N links in an IMA group.

IMA group Group of links at one end used to establish an IMA virtual link to otherend.

IMA sublayer Sublayer part of the Physical layer and located between the interfacespecific Transmission Convergence (TC) sublayer and the ATM layer.

IMA virtual link Virtual link established between two IMA units over a number ofphysical links (IMA group).

ASON service Service that is configured directly by the T2000. The service within thetransmission network is requested by the T2000 and then created by theNE’s control plane through signaling.

IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards andcontrols the remote NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC meansthat the IP over DCC uses overhead DCC byte (the default is D1-D3)for communication.

L

Loopback The fault of each path on the optical fibre can be located by settingloopback for each path of the line. There are three kinds of loopbackmodes: No loopback, outloop, inloop.

M

MSP Multiplex Section Protection. The MSP function provides capability forswitching a signal from a working to a protection section.

Multiplexer An equipment which combines a number of tributary channels onto afewer number of aggregate bearer channels, the relationship betweenthe tributary and aggregate channels being fixed.

O

Orderwire It establishes the voice communication among the operators andmaintenance engineers work in each working station.

Overheadinformation

Auxiliary Channel Overhead Information is information that may betransferred by an optical network layer but which does not by necessityhave to be associated with a particular connection. An example of suchan auxiliary channel is a data communications channel for the purposesof transferring management data between management entities. NOTE- These management entities are not trail termination and adaptationfunctions.

R

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description B Glossary

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary B-3

Page 228: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

RPR Resilient Packet Ring. A metropolitan area network (MAN) technologysupporting data transfer among stations interconnected in a dual-ringconfiguration.

Regeneration The process of receiving and reconstructing a digital signal so that theamplitudes, waveforms and timing of its signal elements are constrainedwithin specified limits.

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. A hierarchical set of digital transportstructures, standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloadsover physical transmission networks.

SNCP SubNetwork Connection Protection. A working subnetwork connectionis replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the workingsubnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a requiredlevel.

SLA Service Level Agreement. A negotiated agreement between an end userand the service provider. Its significance varies depending on the serviceofferings. The SLA may include a number of attributes such as, but notlimited to, traffic contract, availability, performance, encryption,authentication, pricing and billing mechanism, and so on.

Service plane The service plane comprises: a) service presentation functionality beingpresented to the end user; b) service implementation aspects with whichthe end user interacts. For example, service invocation, control servicelevel agreement function, and so on. Note that a) and b) use the totalityof the transfer capabilities including control and managementfunctionalities.

T

TPS Tributary Protection Switching. A function provided by the equipment,is intended to protect N tributary processing boards through a standbytributary processing board.

TCM Tandem Connection Monitor. In the SDH transport hierarchy, the TCMis located between the AU/TU management layer and HP/LP layer. Ituses the N1/N2 byte of POH overhead to monitor the quality of thetransport channels on a transmission section (TCM section).

Timeslot Single timeslot on a E1 digital interface—that is, a 64-kbps,synchronous, full-duplex data channel, typically used for a single voiceconnection.

B GlossaryOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

B-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 229: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

This chapter lists the acronyms and abbreviations used in this manual.

A

ABR Available Bit Rate

ADM Add/Drop Multiplexer

AMI Alternate Mark Inversion

APS Automatic Protection Switching

ASON Automatically Switched Optical Network

ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode

B

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply System

BPA Optical Booster & Pre-amplifier Unit

C

CAR Committed Access Rate

CBR Constant Bit Rate

CC Continuity Check

CMI Coded Mark Inversion

CR-LDP Constrained Route Label Distribution Protocol

CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First

D

DCC Data Communication Channels

DCE Data Circuit-terminal Equipment

DDN Digital Data Network

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-1

Page 230: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

DVB-ASI Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface

DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing

E

ECC Embedded Control Channel

EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility

EPL Ethernet Private Line

EPLAN Ethernet Private LAN

ESCON Enterprise Systems Connection

ETS European Telecommunication Standards

ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute

EVPL Ethernet Virtual Private Line

EVPLAN Ethernet Virtual Private LAN

F

FC fiber Channel

FE Fast Ethernet

FEC Forward Error Correction

FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array

G

GE Gigabit Ethernet

GFP Generic Framing Procedure

GMPLS General Multiprotocol Label Switching

H

HDB3 High Density Bipolar of order 3 code

HDLC High level Data Link Control

I

IEC International Electrotechnical Commission

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IETF Internet Engineering Task Force

IGMP Internet Group Management Protocol

IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM

C Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

C-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 231: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - TelecommunicationStandardization Sector

L

LACP Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LAN Local Area Network; Local Area Network

LAPS Link Access Procedure-SDH

LB Loopback

LCAS Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme

LCT Local Craft Terminal

LPT Link State Path Through

LSP Label Switch Path

M

MAC Media Access Control

MADM Multi Add/Drop Multiplexer

MCF Message Communication Function

MLM Multi-Longitudinal Mode (laser)

MPLS Multiprotocol Label Switching

MSP Multiplex Section Protection

N

NEBS Network Equipment-Building System

nrt-VBR Non-Real Time Variable Bite rate

NS Network Side

O

OADM Optical Add/drop Multiplexer

OAM Operation, Administration and Maintenance

OAM&P Operation, Administration, Maintenance and Provision

OSP OptiX Software Platform

OTM Optical Terminal Multiplexer

P

PDH Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PE Provider Edge

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description C Acronyms and Abbreviations

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary C-3

Page 232: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

PPP Point-to-Point Protocol

Q

QoS Quality of Service

R

RPR Resilient Packet Ring

RSTP Rapid Span Tree Protocol

rt-VBR Real Time Variable Bite rate

RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Setup Protocol with Traffic-EngineeringExtensions

S

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SFP Small Form Pluggable

SLA Service Level Agreement

SLM Sigle-Longitudinal Mode (laser)

SNCP Sub-Network Connection Protection

STP Span Tree Protocol

T

TCM Tandem connection monitoring;

TPS Tributary Protection Switching

U

UBR Unspecified Bit Rate

V

VC Virtual Channel

VCC Virtual Channel Connection

VLAN Virtual Local Area Network

VP Virtual Path

VPC Virtual Path Connection

VPN Virtual Private Network

W

WDM Wavelength Division Multiplexing

WTR Wait-to-Restore

C Acronyms and AbbreviationsOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

C-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 233: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

Index

Aaccess capacity

slot, 2-4ASON

copper service, 7-15diamond service, 7-8end-to-end, 7-5equilibrium of network traffic, 7-21feature, 2-18gold service, 7-12iron service, 7-16link

control link, 7-3TE link, 7-4

mesh networking, 7-6preset restoring trail, 7-21protocol encryption, 7-23reverting route, 7-20service association, 7-18service migration, 7-20service optimization, 7-20shared risk link group, 7-22silver service, 7-13SLA, 7-7software, 4-5trail group, 7-22tunnel, 7-17

ATMapplication, 5-25function, 5-23protection, 5-29

ATM service, 2-7auxiliary board, 3-40

Bboard

function, 3-30software, 4-2type, 3-30

board version replacement, 2-22built-in WDM, 2-13

Ccabinet, 3-2clock, 2-23clock output, 9-3clock protection

extended SSM enabled, 9-5SSM not enabled, 9-4standard SSM enabled, 9-5

clock sourceexternal, 9-2free-run mode, 9-3hold-over mode, 9-3internal, 9-3line, 9-2locked mode, 9-3tributary, 9-2

cross-connect capacity, 2-3

Ddata processing board, 3-37DDN

application, 5-32function, 5-31service, 2-7

DDN processing board, 3-36

EE13 function, 2-19electromagnetic compatibility, 11-20environment

operation, 11-26specification, 11-21storage, 11-22transportation, 11-24

EPLbased on port, 5-7based on port+VLAN, 5-8

EPLAN, 5-9ETH-OAM, 2-20Ethernet

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Index

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-1

Page 234: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

application, 5-7function, 5-2protection, 5-11service, 2-7

EVPL, 5-8EVPLAN, 5-10extended subrack, 2-14

Hhot fix, 2-21HWECC

application, 6-5feature, 6-4

Iintelligent fan, 8-6inter-board alarm suppression, 2-21interface

administration, 2-10alarm, 2-10ATM service, 2-10clock, 2-10DDN service, 2-9Ethernet service, 2-9orderwire, 2-10PDH service, 2-9SAN service, 2-10SDH service, 2-9type, 11-3

IP over DCCapplication, 6-6feature, 6-6

LLCAS

dynamic bandwidth adjustment, 5-11virtual concatenation group protection, 5-12

MM13 function, 2-19

NNE software, 4-3network application, 1-1networking, 2-11

OOAM

information interworking, 2-22network management, 10-3security management, 10-3

operation and maintenance, 10-2

optical booster amplifier board, 3-39OSI over DCC

application, 6-8feature, 6-8

PPDH processing board, 3-35PDH service, 2-7PRBS function, 2-21protection

1+1 BPS, 8-41+1 for ATM board, 8-51+1 for WDM, 8-61+1 hot backup

cross-connect and timing, 8-3PIU, 8-6SCC, 8-4

1+1 PPS, 8-41:N for +3.3 V, 8-7DNI, 8-15equipment level, 2-17fiber-shared virtual trail, 8-16linear MSP, 8-8MSP ring, 8-9network level, 2-18optical-path-shared MSP, 8-17RPR, 8-18SNCP, 8-11TPS, 8-2under abnormal conditions, 8-7VP-ring/VC-ring, 8-19

RREG function, 2-16retiming

application, 9-7principle, 9-7

ROPA system, 2-13RPR

application, 5-18function, 5-14protection, 5-20service, 2-7

Ssafety certification, 11-20SAN

feature, 5-30service, 2-8

SDH DCNbackground, 6-2HWECC, 6-4IP over DCC, 6-6OSI over DCC, 6-8solution, 6-3

IndexOptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System

Product Description

i-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-06-15)

Page 235: Appendix a-2!2!23 HUAWEI SDH Multiplexer OptiX OSN 3500 Product Description (V100R007_01) (2)

SDH processing board, 3-33SDH service, 2-6service access capacity, 2-8slot

access capacity, 2-4allocation, 3-5

softwareboard, 4-2

software package loading, 2-20software structure, 4-2specification

ATM optical interface, 11-10auxiliary interface, 11-13clock interface , 11-15colored optical interface, 11-9DDN interface, 11-12Ethernet optical interface, 11-9interface, 11-3laser safety class, 11-11PDH electrical interface, 11-12power consumption and weight, 11-17power supply, 11-16STM-1 optical interface, 11-3STM-16 optical interface, 11-4

FEC, 11-5STM-4 optical interface, 11-4STM-64 optical interface, 11-6

FEC, 11-7subrack, 3-28wavelength and frequency, 11-8

subrack structure, 3-4system architecture, 3-30

TT2000 system, 4-4TCM, 2-19timeslot numbering, 11-16timing and synchronization performance, 11-15transmission performance, 11-15

WWDM board, 3-39

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission SystemProduct Description Index

Issue 01 (2007-06-15) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-3